all | frequencies |
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
photos | label |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 |
|
External Photos | External Photos | 604.08 KiB | / December 03 2013 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
External Photos | External Photos | 450.10 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
ID Label | ID Label/Location Info | 82.52 KiB | September 13 2012 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
1.Authorization letter(SLS-BD106Q) | Cover Letter(s) | 159.66 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
2.C2PC Letter(SLS-BD106Q) | Cover Letter(s) | 315.15 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
3.Authorization Letter(SLS-BD106Q) | Cover Letter(s) | 237.71 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
4.Request for Confidentiality sign(SLS-BD106Q) | Cover Letter(s) | 165.04 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Operational Description(En) | Operational Description | January 17 2018 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Authorization Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 78.48 KiB | March 14 2013 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Authorized Individual Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 45.39 KiB | March 14 2013 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
C2PC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 124.75 KiB | March 14 2013 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Confidentiality Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 129.86 KiB | March 14 2013 | |||
1 2 3 4 | Operational Description | Operational Description | March 14 2013 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | March 14 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | March 14 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | March 14 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | / October 09 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 4.67 MiB | / October 09 2013 | |||
1 2 3 4 | Part list | Parts List/Tune Up Info | December 20 2012 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | December 20 2012 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Tune up info | Parts List/Tune Up Info | December 20 2012 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.72 MiB | December 20 2012 / June 18 2013 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 4.28 MiB | December 20 2012 / June 18 2013 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 304.50 KiB | / December 03 2013 | |||
1 2 3 4 | Schematics | Schematics | September 13 2012 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | September 13 2012 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | September 13 2012 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Tune-Up Procedure | Parts List/Tune Up Info | September 13 2012 | confidential |
1 2 3 4 | External Photos | External Photos | 604.08 KiB | / December 03 2013 |
EXTERNAL PHOTOGRAPHS FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 105-1, JANGAM-RI, MAJANG-MYEON, ICHEON-SI, KYUNGGI-DO, 467-811 KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD Page of 8 EXTERNAL PHOTO FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 105-1, JANGAM-RI, MAJANG-MYEON, ICHEON-SI, KYUNGGI-DO, 467-811 KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD Page of 8 EXTERNAL PHOTO FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 105-1, JANGAM-RI, MAJANG-MYEON, ICHEON-SI, KYUNGGI-DO, 467-811 KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD Page of 8 EXTERNAL PHOTO FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 105-1, JANGAM-RI, MAJANG-MYEON, ICHEON-SI, KYUNGGI-DO, 467-811 KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD Page of 8 EXTERNAL PHOTO FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 105-1, JANGAM-RI, MAJANG-MYEON, ICHEON-SI, KYUNGGI-DO, 467-811 KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD Page of 8 EXTERNAL PHOTO FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 105-1, JANGAM-RI, MAJANG-MYEON, ICHEON-SI, KYUNGGI-DO, 467-811 KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD Page of 8 EXTERNAL PHOTO FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 105-1, JANGAM-RI, MAJANG-MYEON, ICHEON-SI, KYUNGGI-DO, 467-811 KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD Page of 8 FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q EXTERNAL PHOTO 105-1, JANGAM-RI, MAJANG-MYEON, ICHEON-SI, KYUNGGI-DO, 467-811 KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD Page of 8
1 2 3 4 | External Photos | External Photos | 450.10 KiB |
FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q EXTERNAL PHOTOGRAPHS 74, Seoicheon-ro 578beon-gil, Majang-myeon, Icheon-si, Gyeonggi-do, 17383, Rep. of KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD. Page of 7 EXTERNAL PHOTO(Front) FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 74, Seoicheon-ro 578beon-gil, Majang-myeon, Icheon-si, Gyeonggi-do, 17383, Rep. of KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD. Page of 7 EXTERNAL PHOTO(Back) FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 74, Seoicheon-ro 578beon-gil, Majang-myeon, Icheon-si, Gyeonggi-do, 17383, Rep. of KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD. Page of 7 EXTERNAL PHOTO(Top) FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 74, Seoicheon-ro 578beon-gil, Majang-myeon, Icheon-si, Gyeonggi-do, 17383, Rep. of KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD. Page of 7 EXTERNAL PHOTO(Bottom) FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 74, Seoicheon-ro 578beon-gil, Majang-myeon, Icheon-si, Gyeonggi-do, 17383, Rep. of KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD. Page of 7 EXTERNAL PHOTO(Left) FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 74, Seoicheon-ro 578beon-gil, Majang-myeon, Icheon-si, Gyeonggi-do, 17383, Rep. of KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD. Page of 7 EXTERNAL PHOTO (Right) FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 74, Seoicheon-ro 578beon-gil, Majang-myeon, Icheon-si, Gyeonggi-do, 17383, Rep. of KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD. Page of 7
1 2 3 4 | ID Label | ID Label/Location Info | 82.52 KiB | September 13 2012 |
FCC: A3LSLS-BD106Q 1.1 ID Label Information Following is a copy of the label that will be placed on the rear side of the cabinet. Both the FCC ID and compliance statement are included in the product label Figure 1.1 PRODUCT LABEL FCC Model FCC EUT Type
: SLS-BD106Q
: A3LSLS-BD106Q
: RRH(Remote RF Head) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference , and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, Including interference that may cause undesired operation. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 416, Maetan-3dong, Yeongtong-gu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea MADE IN KOREA 105-1, Jangam-ri , Majang-Myeon, Icheon-si, Kyunggi-Do, 467-811, KOREA TEL:+82 31 645 6300 FAX:+82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD. Report No. : HCTR1005FR15 1 / 2 FCC: A3LSLS-BD106Q 1.2 Label Location Photos The label shown shall be permanently affixed at a conspicuous location on the device and be readily visible to the user at the time purchase.(Labeling requirements per 2.925) Figure 1.2 LABEL LOCATION LABEL 105-1, Jangam-ri , Majang-Myeon, Icheon-si, Kyunggi-Do, 467-811, KOREA TEL:+82 31 645 6300 FAX:+82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD. Report No. : HCTR1005FR15 2 / 2
1 2 3 4 | 1.Authorization letter(SLS-BD106Q) | Cover Letter(s) | 159.66 KiB |
SAMSUNG Electronics CO., Ltd.
(Maetan-dong) 129, Samsung-ro, Yeongtong-gu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Republic of Korea Model Number : SMM-BD106Q To whom it may it concern:
I hereby appoint HWAN-YOUL KIM to sign letters and applications for any filings with regulatory agencies on our behalf, and to receive and exchange data between our company, the agents company and the agency in connection with certification for any products that our company owns or manufactures. Sincerely,
----------------------------------------------------
CHANHO, YOUN / General Manger Address: 19 Chapin Rd., Building D Pine Brook, NJ 07058 Tel: 973-808-6362 201-956-9613 Date: December 29, 2017
1 2 3 4 | 2.C2PC Letter(SLS-BD106Q) | Cover Letter(s) | 315.15 KiB |
SAMSUNG Electronics CO., Ltd.
(Maetan-dong) 129, Samsung-ro, Yeongtong-gu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Republic of Korea December 29, 2017 Application Examiner / Reviewing Engineer Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 To Whom It May Concern, Class II permissive change We, Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd request Class II permissive change since a authorized product (FCC ID : A3LSLS-BD106Q) is added to operation modes below.
(original date : 09/13/2012, First C2PC : 12/20/2012, Second C2PC : 03/14/2013) TD-LTE 15MHz Channel Bandwidth 1Carrier : 7.5W per carrier, 1 carrier per port 4 port, 30W total power Theres no hardware-related change. If you have questions or need further information, please contact the undersigned. Sincerely,
---------------------------------------------------------------
HWAN-YOUL KIM / Principal Research Engineer SAMSUNG Electronics Co.,Ltd.
1 2 3 4 | 3.Authorization Letter(SLS-BD106Q) | Cover Letter(s) | 237.71 KiB |
SAMSUNG Electronics CO., Ltd.
(Maetan-dong) 129, Samsung-ro, Yeongtong-gu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Republic of Korea Date: December 29, 2017 Compliance Certification Services Certification Division 561F Monterey Road Morgan Hill, CA 95037 To whom it may concern:
We, the undersigned, hereby authorize < HCT CO., LTD.>, to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by < HCT CO., LTD.> on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. We, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 853(a). In authorizing < HCT CO., LTD.> as our agent, we still recognize that we are responsible to:
a) b) c) d) e) f) g) comply with the relevant provisions of the certification program;
make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including provision for examining documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;
make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which certification has been granted;
do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification Division into disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;
upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising matter that contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;
use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity with specified standards;
endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a misleading manner;
h) i) j) ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division;
keep a record of all complaints made known to the us relating to the products compliance with requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division when requested;
take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies found in products or services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;
k) document the actions taken. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely Yours, HWAN-YOUL KIM / Principal Research Engineer SAMSUNG Electronics Co.,Ltd
(Maetan-dong) 129, Samsung-ro, Yeongtong-gu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, 16677, Republic of Korea REMARK:
This authorization letter will be sent along with your application when filing with the Certification Division. Please follow the format and type it on company letterhead and send original to us. 1 2
1 2 3 4 | 4.Request for Confidentiality sign(SLS-BD106Q) | Cover Letter(s) | 165.04 KiB |
SAMSUNG Electronics CO., Ltd.
(Maetan-dong) 129, Samsung-ro, Yeongtong-gu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Republic of Korea Date: December 29, 2017 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road, Columbia, MD 21046 RE: Request of Confidentiality for FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q To Whom It May Concern:
Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules (CFR 47), and Section 552 (b) (4) of the Freedom of Information Act, SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.. hereby requests confidentiality and treatment of certain information accompanying this application. The materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the Applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. We are also hereby request Short-Term Confidentiality for 180 days after the grant as outlined in Public Notice DA 04-1705. This provision will give SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. temporary confidentiality of commercially sensitive information prior to product release. The requested Confidential and Temporary Confidential exhibits are listed as follows:
CONFIDENTIAL AND SHORT-TERM CONFIDENTIAL LIST 1 Exhibit Description Operational Descriptions CONFIDENTIAL The Applicant understands that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this application and all accompanying documentations, where applicable, will not be made public before the date of the Grant for this application. Sincerely, HWAN-YOUL KIM / Principal Research Engineer SAMSUNG Electronics Co.,Ltd.
(Maetan-dong) 129, Samsung-ro, Yeongtong-gu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, 16677, Republic of Korea
1 2 3 4 | Authorization Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 78.48 KiB | March 14 2013 |
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. Date: February 26, 2013 Compliance Certification Services Certification Division 561F Monterey Road Morgan Hill, CA 95037 To whom it may concern:
We, the undersigned, hereby authorize < HCT CO., LTD.>, to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by < HCT CO., LTD.> on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. We, t he undersigned, hereb y cert ify that we are n ot sub ject to a deni al of federal benefi ts, that includes FCC b enefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act o f 1988, 21 U.S.C. 853(a). In authorizing < HCT CO., LTD.> as our agent, we still recognize that we are responsible to:
a) comply with the relevant provisions of the certification program;
b) c) d) e) f) make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including provision for examining documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;
make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which certification has been granted;
do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification Division into disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;
upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising matter that contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;
use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity with specified standards;
g) h) i) j) endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a misleading manner;
ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division;
keep a record of all complaints made known to the us relating to the products compliance with requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division when requested;
take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies found in products or services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;
k) document the actions taken. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely Yours, REMARK:
1. This aut horization letter wi ll be sent along wi th yo ur application wh en fi ling wi th t he Certification Division. Please follow the format and type it on company letterhead and send original to us. 2.
1 2 3 4 | Authorized Individual Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 45.39 KiB | March 14 2013 |
^D^hE'>
Dz^'<
dt/D
/Joon-Ho Lee
^
6DQJ.\XQJ3HWHU5D*HQHUDO0DQDJHU
6DPVXQJ(OHFWURQLFV&2/7'
7(/
)$;
'DWHFebruary 26, 2013
1 2 3 4 | C2PC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 124.75 KiB | March 14 2013 |
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd 416, Maetan-3dong, Yeongtong-gu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea February 28, 2013 Application Examiner / Reviewing Engineer Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 To Whom It May Concern, Class II permissive change We, Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd would like to request Class II permissive change for a certified product (FCC ID : A3LSLS-BD106Q) with added operation modes. The device has four rf ports. Total aggregate power across all four ports is 80W. This device supports both 2T2R and 4T4R Spatial Multiplexing MIMO. WiMax only: 5W per carrier, 4 carrier per port, 4 ports, 80W total power 5W per carrier, 4 carrier per port, 2 ports, 40W total power TD-LTE only: 10W per carrier, 2 carrier per port, 2 ports, 40W total power WiMax and TD-LTE: 5W per carrier, 2 carriers per port, 4 ports for WiMax and 10W per carrier, single carrier per port, 4 ports for TD-LTE, 80W total power. Theres no hardware-related change. If you have questions or need further information, please contact the undersigned. Sincerely,
------------------------------------------------------
JOON-HO LEE / Senior Reserch Engineer Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd
1 2 3 4 | Confidentiality Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 129.86 KiB | March 14 2013 |
Request for Confidentiality Date: February 26, 2013 Compliance Certification Services Fremont, CA 94538 RE:
FCC ID:
Confidentiality Request Pursuant to Sections 0.4 57 an d 0.45 9 of the Commissions Rule, the applicant hereb y reque sts confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:
Certification Application A3LSLS-BD106Q CONFIDENTIAL AND SHORT-TERM CONFIDENTIAL LIST Exhibit Description CONFIDENTIAL SHORT-TERM CONFIDENTIAL 1 Operational Description 2 1 2 Test-Setup Photos Users Manual We are also hereby request Short-Term Confidentiality for 180 days after the grant as outlined in Public Notice DA 04-1705. This provision will give SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. temporary confidentiality of commercially sensitive information prior to product release. The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The applicant understands that pursuant to rule 0.457 & 0.459, disclosure od this application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the GRANT for this application. Thank you for your attention in this matter. Applicants Company : SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. Address: 416, Maetan-3dong, Yeongtong-gu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea Joon-Ho, Lee / Senior Research Engineer
1 2 3 4 | User Manual | Users Manual | 4.67 MiB | / October 09 2013 |
2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 COPYRIGHT This manual is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. and is protected by copyright. No information contained herein may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated for any commercial purposes or disclosed to the third party in any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. TRADEMARKS Product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective companies. This manual should be read and used as a guideline for properly installing and operating the product. This manual may be changed for the system improvement, standardization and other technical reasons without prior notice. If you need updated manuals or have any questions concerning the contents of the manuals, contact our Document Center at the following address or Web site:
Address: Document Center 3rd Floor Jeong-bo-tong-sin-dong. Dong-Suwon P.O. Box 105, 416, Maetan-3dong Yeongtong-gu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea 442-600 Homepage: http://www.samsungdocs.com 2012 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual INTRODUCTION Purpose This manual describes how to install the RRH-B4 and how to connect cables. RRH-B4 can be connected to the following systems:
U-RAS Flexible V2 DU, which is a Base Station (BS) of Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE multi-mode Smart MBS UADU, which is an eNB of TD-LTE Document Content and Organization This document consists of 4 Chapters, 7 Annex and Abbreviation, which are summarized as follows:
CHAPTER 1. Before Installation This chapter introduces the safety rules that must be understood for installing the RRH-B4 and describes the block diagram of the RRH-B4. CHAPTER 2. Installing System This chapter describes the procedures to install the RRH-B4. CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables This chapter describes the procedures to connect the cables to the RRH-B4 installed. CHAPTER 4. Checking Installation Status This chapter describes the procedures of inspecting installation status after RRH-B4 installation and cabling is completed. ANNEX A. Sector Antenna Installation This annex describes the sector antenna configurations and its installation requirements. ANNEX B. Installing Feeder Cable This annex describes cautions and allowed radius of curvature when installing feeder line. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. I 2600-00F1W8GAA INTRODUCTION Ver. 4.0 ANNEX C. Connector Assembly This annex describes the procedure of assembling the connector. ANNEX D. Cleaning Optic Connector This annex describes the procedure of cleaning the optic connector and cleaning tool. ANNEX E. Cable Gland Assembly This annex describes the procedure of assembling the cable gland. ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly This annex describes the procedure of assembling the pressure terminal. ANNEX G. Standard Torque This annex describes the standard torque when tightening the bolt. ABBREVIATION Describes the acronyms used in this manual. Conventions The following types of paragraphs contain special information that must be carefully read and thoroughly understood. Such information may or may not be enclosed in a rectangular box, separating it from the main text, but is always preceded by an icon and/or a bold title. WARNING Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid personal injury or fatality. CAUTION Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid a service failure or damage to the system. CHECKPOINT Provides the operator with checkpoints for stable system operation. II SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual NOTE Indicates additional information as a reference. Revision History VERSION DATE OF ISSUE REMARKS 4.0 3.0 11. 2012. Changed Specifications (Main Specifications, Environmental Condition, and RF Specification) 10. 2012.
- Changed System Consumption Current (1.2)
- Changed Cable Gland Specification: M20 22051y7 M25 2253y8 (Figure 1.2 and Figure 3.22) 2.0 09. 2012.
- Added contents for Smart MBS
- U-RAS Flexible V2: WiMAX only WiMAX/TD-LTE multi-
1.0 08. 2012. First Version mode support SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. III 2600-00F1W8GAA INTRODUCTION Ver. 4.0 This page is intentionally left blank. IV SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual SAFETY CONCERNS The purpose of the Safety Concerns section is to ensure the safety of users and prevent property damage. Please read this document carefully for proper use. Symbols Caution Indication of a general caution Restriction Indication for prohibiting an action for a product Instruction Indication for commanding a specifically required action SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. V 2600-00F1W8GAA SAFETY CONCERNS Ver. 4.0 Warning WARNING Power and Grounding Cautions When Using Insulation Tester Pay attention to the followings to prevent any personal injury caused by an electric shock when using an insulation tester.
- Make sure the polarity is correct when connecting the Earth COM (black) and AC.V (red) lead lines. And do not touch the connected probes (inspecting part of the lead line) with a hand and avoid body contact.
- Avoid body contact to the system when measuring an insulation resistance. Watches, rings, and other metallic accessories Do not wear accessories such as watches and rings in order to prevent electrical shock. Power Switch Off Make sure the power switch of power supplier is off when installing the system. Installing the system with power switch on may cause system damage or fatal human injury when cables are not correctly connected. Connecting Ground Cable When connecting the cables, always connect the ground cable first. If worker contacts the equipment, connect a cable or perform maintenance without connecting the ground cable, the system can be damaged or a worker may be injured due to static electricity and short circuit. Turning Off the Circuit Breaker before Connecting the Power Cable Since power is applied to the system where the power cable is connected by manipulating the circuit breaker of the rectifier, be sure to check the rectifiers breaker is turned off (open) before connecting the power cable to the power connector. If the system is installed while the circuit breaker is on, the worker may be critically injured as soon as the cable is connected in the wrong way. VI SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Installation Warning for Laser Beam Running through Optical Cables In the system, the laser beam emitting light runs through the optical cable. The exposure of the laser beam on workers eye may cause serious injury so that it should be handled with care. Warning for Workers Injury When installing cables in a small area, do not apply excessive force. Worker may bump against a wall or equipment. Protection gloves and goggles Make sure that worker wears protection gloves and goggles to prevent damages from debris while drilling holes in a wall or ceiling. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. VII 2600-00F1W8GAA SAFETY CONCERNS Ver. 4.0 Caution CAUTION Power and Feeder line Cautions while Cleaning Power Supply While cleaning the power supply device, take caution that the device does not come in contact with alien bodies that may cause power failure. Precautions While Measuring Insulation Resistance Observe the followings to prevent any system damage when measuring insulation resistance because there is a very high voltage.
- Before measuring insulation resistance, disconnect all the cables connected to the system.
- Do not measure insulation resistance when power is on.
- Do not measure insulation resistance at any other positions such as system internal units or parts other than the targeted insulation resistance measuring points. System Grounding Method Ground bar for lightning protector/power/communication must be isolated from each other. These three ground bars can be grounded as the isolation grounding method, or branched from ground mesh buried in the underground as common grounding method. Precautions When Connecting Power Cable To secure rainproof performance of a cable gland, min. 11.81 in. (300 mm) straight section must be maintained. Here, the radius of curvature must be considered according to the cable specification. When Using Power Cables
- W hen handling the power cable, ensure the power switch of a rectifier is turned off to prevent the risk from the power cable and electric short-circuit of related cables.
- Because a power accident may occur when fixing parts get loosened, make sure that fasteners to fix the power cable should be firmly fastened. VIII SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Check When Fixing the Power Cable Fix the power cable and the power cable bracket using a stainless steel tie for preventing loose contact due to cable tension and leakage problems. It is recommended to use the designated tools to tighten the stainless steel tie. Caution for Rain-proof Gasket Damage Be careful the rain-proof gasket is not damaged during work, and check again the gasket is not damaged before closing power/DTA window cover. If the rain-proof gasket is damaged, replace the RRH-B4. Power Window Cover Be sure to check the circuit breaker for RRH-B4 is turned off before opening or closing the power window cover. If the cover is open or close while the circuit breaker is on, the system can be damaged or a worker may be critically injured due to electrical short-circuit. Precautions When Cutting Power Cable Install the power cable to the power port of system by considering the radius of curvature of its cable specification and then cut the cable. If you install the cable after cutting, there may be length difference among the core wires at the end of the cable because of cable curvature. This may result in poor contact after the cable is connected to the power port. Installing the Antenna When you install the antenna, the antenna must be within the protective angle
(left/right side 45 each from the central axis) to prevent the antenna from lightning damage. Checking VSWR for Minimum Cable Bend Radius and Length of RF Cable If the VSW R value for minimum cable bend radius and length of RF cable is not applied, system may not work properly because RF signals cannot transmit or receive smoothly. So, the VSWR value for minimum cable bend radius and length of RF cable must be checked and applied. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. IX 2600-00F1W8GAA SAFETY CONCERNS Ver. 4.0 Cautions When Measuring VSWR When measuring VSWR, if you open the antenna port when the transmission output is not completely off, a spike signal may flow into the reception path, which may cause damage to LNA. Make sure the transmission output is completely off when measuring VSWR. Cable Work Sequence When performing cable work for the system, proceed with the ground work before any other work to prevent errors occurring due to static electricity and other reasons. Radius of Curvature of Feeder Line When installing a feeder line, the radius of curvature of the sections where cables bent should be larger than the allowed radius of curvature. If the radius of curvature for the feeder line installation is less than the allowed radius of curvature, it may affect the performance of the system. Connection of Feeder Cable Connector Connecting the feeder cable connector is critical process, so the qualified workers who finished the related education should perform. Installation Cautions while Cleaning the Rack Make sure that worker does not damage installed cables while cleaning the rack. Do not Work by Yourself Worker must not work alone in any key process. Managing Unused Ports Never allow foreign substances to be inserted into unused ports by covering them with a dust cap. X SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Finishing the Cable Inlet To prevent foreign substances, outdoor air and moisture from entering the cable inlet (including cable gland and conduit), finish it as follows:
- Unused inlet Use the hole finishing materials including dust cap and rubber packing.
- Cable-installed inlet After cable installation, block any space in the inlet with tape, compressed sponge, rubber packing, and silicon. Management of Unused Ports Cover the unused ports (conduit, cable gland, etc.) with waterproof cap (sealing cap) to prevent infiltration of foreign material such as dust, moisture, or bug. Caution When Connecting the Optical Cable Check whether there is dust or foreign material on the cutting section of the connector core before connecting the optic cable, and keep this away from dust or foreign material. If the cable is soiled with foreign material, do not blow to remove them. Make sure to clean the connector in accordance with the cleaning directions in ANNEX D. Caution When Assembling Cable Gland If the parts of a cable gland in the system are not correctly installed, outdoor air and moisture may flow into the system and cause corrosion, system fault, or serious fault to the cooling system. Therefore, assemble and finish the cable gland accurately. Caution When Installing Cable in the Cable Gland Only one cable of permitted specification (thickness) should be installed in the cable gland.
- The outdoor air or moisture may flow into the system if a cable that is thinner than the specification is used.
- If a cable is thicker than the specification or more than two cables are installed, the cable gland may be damaged. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XI 2600-00F1W8GAA SAFETY CONCERNS Ver. 4.0 Checking Assembly State of the Unused Cable Gland All components of the unused cable gland must be secured in the original factory configuration. If the cable gland nut is fitted without the waterproof filler or the protection cover in place, reassemble them as illustrated in Unused Cable Gland Inspection and Assembly. California USA Only This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. XII SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION I Purpose ............................................................................................................................................................... I Document Content and Organization .............................................................................................................. I Conventions .......................................................................................................................................................II Revision History................................................................................................................................................III SAFETY CONCERNS V Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................. V Warning............................................................................................................................................................. VI Caution............................................................................................................................................................ VIII California USA Only ....................................................................................................................................... XII CHAPTER 1. Before Installation 1-1 1.1 System Configuration............................................................................................................ 1-1 1.2 Specifications......................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.3 Cautions for Installation ........................................................................................................ 1-6 1.4 Pre-survey .............................................................................................................................. 1-8 1.5 Installation Tools ................................................................................................................... 1-9 CHAPTER 2. Installing System 2-1 2.1 Installing the RRH-B4 ............................................................................................................ 2-1 2.2 Foundation Work ................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 System Arrangement ..................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.2.2 Marking and Drilling ....................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.3 Unpacking and Transporting ................................................................................................ 2-6 Importing Items ............................................................................................................................... 2-6 2.3.1 2.3.2 Unpacking Items ............................................................................................................................. 2-6 2.4 Fixing System......................................................................................................................... 2-7 2.4.1 Fixing Unit Mounting Bracket ........................................................................................................ 2-7 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XIII 2600-00F1W8GAA TABLE OF CONTENTS Ver. 4.0 2.4.2 Fixing RRH-B4................................................................................................................................2-9 2.5 System Leveling ................................................................................................................... 2-14 2.6 Insulation Test...................................................................................................................... 2-15 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 3-1 3.1 Work Flow for Cabling ........................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Cabling .................................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.3 Grounding ............................................................................................................................... 3-8 3.3.1 Grounding the System ...................................................................................................................3-9 3.4 Power Cabling ...................................................................................................................... 3-11 3.4.1 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable ..................................................................................... 3-12 3.4.2 Power Test .................................................................................................................................... 3-31 3.5 External Interface Construction......................................................................................... 3-32 3.5.1 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection........................................................................... 3-32 3.5.2 RET Cable Connection ............................................................................................................... 3-70 3.5.3 RF Cable Connection .................................................................................................................. 3-73 CHAPTER 4. Checking Installation Status 4-1 4.1 Installation Checking Procedure ........................................................................................... 4-1 ANNEX A. Sector Antenna Installation A-1 A.1 Cautions when Installing a Sector Antenna ........................................................................ A-1 A.2 Sector Antenna Layout ......................................................................................................... A-1 A.3 Sector Antenna Installation .................................................................................................. A-2 ANNEX B. Installing Feeder Cable B-1 B.1 Cautions When Installing Feeder Cable .............................................................................. B-1 B.2 7/8 in. Feeder Line Ground ................................................................................................... B-4 B.3 Tower Ground Construction ................................................................................................. B-8 ANNEX C. Connector Assembly C-1 C.1 RJ-45 (Shield Type) ............................................................................................................... C-1 C.2 RJ-45 (Normal Type) .............................................................................................................. C-3 C.3 N type-male (LMR-400) .......................................................................................................... C-4 XIV SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual C.4 TNC-male (LMR-400) .............................................................................................................. C-6 C.5 N type-male (1/2 in. feeder line) ............................................................................................ C-8 C.6 Din type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) ..................................................................................... C-12 C.7 Finishing the Connector Connection Part by Tape ........................................................... C-14 C.8 How to Shrink the Heat Shrink Tube .................................................................................. C-15 C.8.1 When Assembling a Connector to the Feeder Line................................................................ C-15 C.8.2 When Connecting a Connector to another Connector........................................................... C-17 ANNEX D. Cleaning Optic Connector D-1 D.1 Cleaning Optic Connector ..................................................................................................... D-1 IBCTM Brand Cleaner .............................................................................................................. D-2 IBCTM Brand Type Cleaner (P/N 9393) ...................................................................................... D-2 D.2.1 D.2 ANNEX E. Cable Gland Assembly E-1 E.1 Cable Gland Components ..................................................................................................... E-2 E.2 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling ..................................................................................... E-3 E.3 Unused Cable Gland Inspection and Assembly .................................................................. E-6 ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly F-1 F.1 Preparations ........................................................................................................................... F-1 F.2 Pressure Reference Table ..................................................................................................... F-2 F.3 Assembling Pressure Terminal............................................................................................. F-5 ANNEX G. Standard Torque ABBREVIATION G-1 I C ~ U ................................................................................................................................................................... I V
..................................................................................................................................................................II SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XV 2600-00F1W8GAA TABLE OF CONTENTS Ver. 4.0 LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1.1 RRH-B4 Configuration .......................................................................................... 1-1 Figure 1.2 External Interface of RRH-B4................................................................................. 1-2 Figure 2.1 Procedure to Install the RRH-B4 ............................................................................ 2-1 Figure 2.2 RRH-B4 Arragement (Wall Type) ........................................................................... 2-2 Figure 2.3 RRH-B4 Arragement (Sector Pole Type)................................................................ 2-3 Figure 2.4 System Marking-Wall Type..................................................................................... 2-4 Figure 2.5 Fixing Unit Mounting Bracket ................................................................................. 2-8 Figure 2.6 Fixing RRH-B4 (Wall Type) .................................................................................. 2-10 Figure 2.7 Fixing RRH-B4 (Pole Type) .................................................................................. 2-12 Figure 2.8 Leveling Using a Level (Example)........................................................................ 2-14 Figure 2.9 Schematic Diagram for Insulation Test (Wall Type) .............................................. 2-16 Figure 2.10 Schematic Diagram for Insulation Test (Pole Type)............................................ 2-16 Figure 3.1 Work Flow for System Cabling ............................................................................... 3-1 Figure 3.2 Detailed Cabling Procedure ................................................................................... 3-2 Figure 3.3 Cabling Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-6 Figure 3.4 Connection of the RRH-B4 Ground Cable ........................................................... 3-10 Figure 3.5 Power Equipment Diagram .................................................................................. 3-11 Figure 3.6 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (1) ............................................... 3-14 Figure 3.7 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (2) ............................................... 3-15 Figure 3.8 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (3) ............................................... 3-17 Figure 3.9 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (4) ............................................... 3-18 Figure 3.10 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (5) ............................................. 3-19 Figure 3.11 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (6).............................................. 3-20 Figure 3.12 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (7) ............................................. 3-21 Figure 3.13 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (1) ........................................... 3-24 Figure 3.14 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (2) ........................................... 3-25 Figure 3.15 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (3) ........................................... 3-26 Figure 3.16 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (4) ........................................... 3-27 Figure 3.17 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (5) ........................................... 3-28 Figure 3.18 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (6) ........................................... 3-29 Figure 3.19 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (7) ........................................... 3-30 Figure 3.20 Specifications of CPRI Cable and Connector ..................................................... 3-32 Figure 3.21 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (1) ................................................ 3-33 Figure 3.22 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (2) ................................................ 3-34 Figure 3.23 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (3) ................................................ 3-35 XVI SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Figure 3.24 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (4) ............................................... 3-36 Figure 3.25 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (5) ............................................... 3-37 Figure 3.26 CPRI Cable Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1) ......................................... 3-39 Figure 3.27 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1 (1) ................................ 3-40 Figure 3.28 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1 (2) ................................ 3-41 Figure 3.29 CPRI Cable Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2) ......................................... 3-43 Figure 3.30 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2 (1) ................................ 3-44 Figure 3.31 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2 (2) ................................ 3-45 Figure 3.32 CPRI Cable Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3) ......................................... 3-47 Figure 3.33 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3 (1) ................................ 3-48 Figure 3.34 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3 (2) ................................ 3-49 Figure 3.35 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #1) .................................................... 3-51 Figure 3.36 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #1 (1) ........................................... 3-52 Figure 3.37 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #1 (2) ........................................... 3-53 Figure 3.38 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #2) .................................................... 3-54 Figure 3.39 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #2 (1) ........................................... 3-55 Figure 3.40 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #2 (2) ........................................... 3-56 Figure 3.41 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Stacking, Case #1) ......................................................... 3-58 Figure 3.42 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #1 (1) ................................................ 3-59 Figure 3.43 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #1 (2) ................................................ 3-60 Figure 3.44 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Stacking, Case #2) ......................................................... 3-62 Figure 3.45 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #2 (1) ................................................ 3-63 Figure 3.46 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #2 (2) ................................................ 3-64 Figure 3.47 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #2 (3) ................................................ 3-65 Figure 3.48 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Stacking, Case #3) ......................................................... 3-67 Figure 3.49 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #3 (1) ................................................ 3-68 Figure 3.50 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case# 3 (2) ................................................ 3-69 Figure 3.51 RET Cable Connection (1) ................................................................................ 3-70 Figure 3.52 RET Cable Connection (2) ................................................................................ 3-71 Figure 3.53 RET Cable Connector ....................................................................................... 3-72 Figure 3.54 RF Cable Configuration ..................................................................................... 3-75 Figure 3.55 RF Cable Connection (1) ................................................................................... 3-76 Figure 3.56 RF Cable Connection (2) ................................................................................... 3-77 Figure 4.1 Installation Checking Procedure ............................................................................ 4-1 Figure A.1 Sector Antenna...................................................................................................... A-3 Figure B.1 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (1) ......................................................................... B-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XVII 2600-00F1W8GAA TABLE OF CONTENTS Ver. 4.0 Figure B.2 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (2)......................................................................... B-5 Figure B.3 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (3)......................................................................... B-6 Figure B.4 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (4)......................................................................... B-7 Figure B.5 Connecting the Tower Ground Cable .................................................................... B-8 Figure C.1 Assembling the RJ-45 Connector (Shield Type) (1) ............................................. C-1 Figure C.2 Assembling the RJ-45 Connector (Shield Type) (2) ............................................. C-2 Figure C.3 Assembling the RJ-45 Connector (Normal Type) ................................................. C-3 Figure C.4 N type-male Connector Assembling (1) ................................................................ C-4 Figure C.5 N type-male Connector Assembling (2) ................................................................ C-5 Figure C.6 TNC-male Connector Assembling (1) ................................................................... C-6 Figure C.7 TNC-male Connector Assembling (2) ................................................................... C-7 Figure C.8 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (1)......................... C-8 Figure C.9 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (2)......................... C-9 Figure C.10 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (3)..................... C-10 Figure C.11 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (4) ..................... C-11 Figure C.12 Assembling the Din type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (1) .................. C-12 Figure C.13 Assembling the Din type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (2) .................. C-13 Figure C.14 Finishing the Connector Connection Part by Tape ........................................... C-14 Figure C.15 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Feeder Line (1) ............................................. C-15 Figure C.16 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Feeder Line (2) ............................................. C-16 Figure C.17 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Connection between Connectors (1)............. C-17 Figure C.18 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Connection between Connectors (2)............. C-18 Figure C.19 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Connection between Connectors (3)............. C-19 Figure D.1 Optic Connector Cleaner (IBC TM Brand Type Cleaner: P/N 9393)........................ D-2 Figure D.2 Optic Module Cleaning (LC Type Jack) ................................................................ D-3 Figure D.3 Optic Cable Connector Cleaning (LC Type Plug) ................................................. D-4 Figure D.4 Measuring the Optical Output and Connecting the Optic Connector .................... D-5 Figure E.1 Cable Gland Components .................................................................................... E-2 Figure E.2 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling (1) ................................................................ E-3 Figure E.3 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling (2) ................................................................ E-4 Figure E.4 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling (3) ................................................................ E-5 Figure E.5 Unused Cable Gland Inspection and Assembly .................................................... E-6 Figure F.1 Preparations ...........................................................................................................F-1 Figure F.2 Pressure Reference Drawing (Handheld Compressor) ..........................................F-2 Figure F.3 Pressure Reference Drawing (Hydraulic Press) .....................................................F-3 XVIII SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Figure F.4 Stripping Cable Sheath (1)..................................................................................... F-5 Figure F.5 Stripping Cable Sheath (2)..................................................................................... F-6 Figure F.6 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Handheld Compressor (1) ............................................ F-8 Figure F.7 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Handheld Compressor (2) ............................................ F-9 Figure F.8 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Hydraulic Press (1) ..................................................... F-10 Figure F.9 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Hydraulic Press (2) ..................................................... F-11 Figure F.10 Assembling Heat Shrink Tube ........................................................................... F-13 LIST OF TABLES Table 1.1 Basic Installation Tools ............................................................................................ 1-9 Table 2.1 Recommended Distances for RRH-B4 Installation.................................................. 2-2 Table 2.2 Anchor Bolt Drill Bits and Hole Depth...................................................................... 2-5 Table 2.3 Unit Mounting Bracket Fixing Parts And Tool .......................................................... 2-7 Table 2.4 RRH-B4 Fixing Parts and Tools (Wall Type) ............................................................ 2-9 Table 2.5 RRH-B4 Fixing Parts and Tools (Pole Type) ..........................................................2-11 Table 2.6 Leveling Using a Level .......................................................................................... 2-14 Table 2.7 Insulation Test ...................................................................................................... 2-15 Table 3.1 Recommended Minimum Allowed Cable Bend Radius ........................................... 3-3 Table 3.2 RRH-B4 Connection Cable .................................................................................... 3-7 Table 3.3 Grounding the RRH-B4 (MGB~RRH-B4) ................................................................ 3-9 Table 3.4 Connecting the DC Power Cable (AW G8, DC Distributor~RRH-B4) ..................... 3-12 Table 3.5 Connecting the DC Power Cable (AW G10, DC Distributor~RRH-B4) ................... 3-22 Table 3.6 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection ...................................................................... 3-32 Table 3.7 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1) ........................... 3-38 Table 3.8 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2) ........................... 3-42 Table 3.9 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3) ........................... 3-46 Table 3.10 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #1) .................................... 3-50 Table 3.11 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #2) ..................................... 3-54 Table 3.12 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Stacking, Case #1) ......................................... 3-57 Table 3.13 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Stacking, Case #2) ......................................... 3-61 Table 3.14 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Stacking, Case #3) ......................................... 3-66 Table 3.15 RET Cable Connection ....................................................................................... 3-70 Table 3.16 RET Cable Connector Pin Map ........................................................................... 3-72 Table 3.17 RF Cable Connection .......................................................................................... 3-73 Table 3.18 RF Cable Connection at Antenna Connection Area ............................................ 3-74 Table 3.19 RF Cable Identification Tag ................................................................................. 3-75 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XIX 2600-00F1W8GAA TABLE OF CONTENTS Ver. 4.0 Table 4.1 Construction Situation Checklist .............................................................................. 4-2 Table B.1 Curvature Radius of Feeder Cable for Outdoor...................................................... B-1 Table B.2 Curvature Radius of Feeder Cable for Indoor (Based on LS Feeder Line) ............ B-2 Table B.3 Curvature Radius of LMR-400 (Based on Times Microwave System).................... B-2 Table B.4 Connector Connection Torque Value ...................................................................... B-3 Table B.5 TGB Installation Example ....................................................................................... B-7 Table F.1 Pressure Reference Table for Pressure Terminal ....................................................F-2 Table F.2 Compressor Specifications per Cable Thickness .....................................................F-4 Table G.1 Standard Torque Value for Tightening Bolts ........................................................... G-1 Table G.2 Brass Bolts Torque Value ....................................................................................... G-1 XX SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual CHAPTER 1. Before Installation 1.1 System Configuration RRH-B4 Configuration The configuration of RRH-B4 is as follows:
Unit: in. (mm)
.
) 5 7 0 2
(
7 1 8
. 13.78 (350)
[Top View]
13.78 (350)
) 0 5 5
(
5 6 1 2
.
[Left View]
[Front View]
[Right View]
[Rear View]
[Bottom View]
Figure 1.1 RRH- B4 Configuration SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-1 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 1. Before Installation Ver. 4.0 External Interface of RRH-B4 The external interface structure of RRH-B4 is as follows:
Optic (Gland M25: 22553y8) ANT_0 ANT_1 ANT_2 ANT_3 Ground Terminal DC Power (Gland M25: 22553y16) RET
[Bottom View]
Figure 1.2 External Interface of RRH-B4 1-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 1.2 Specifications Main Specifications The table below lists the main specifications of the system. Category System Capacity Air specification WiMAX/TD-LTE Channel Bandwidth
- Mobile WiMAX: 10 MHz
- TD-LTE: 20 MHz Operating Frequency 2,496~2,690 MHz (BC41) RRH-B4 Capacity
- WiMAX 4 Carriers
- TD-LTE 2 Carriers Interface between DU and RRH-B4
- WiMAX: 1.25 Gbps CPRI Output
- TD-LTE: 2.5 Gbps CPRI Antenna port based
- WiMAX:
- TD-LTE: 10 W /Carrier/Path Input Power The table below lists the power standard for the RRH-B4. The RRH-B4satisfies the electrical safety standard prescribed in UL60950. If an operator wants to use AC system input voltage, the operator can supply power using an external rectifier (provided by a service provider). Category Standard System Input Voltage
-48 VDC (Voltage Variation Range: -40~-56 VDC) System Consumption Current 9.27 A AVG. @ 48 V, 28: 18 (DL UL ratio)
* Each of the DU (UADU) and RRH-B4 receives -48 VDC of power for its operation. Unit Size and Weight The table below lists the size and weight of the RRH-B4. Category Standard Size [W D H, in. (mm)]
13.8 (350) 8 (207.5) 21.7 (550) Weight [lb (kg)]
About 50.7 (23) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-3 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 1. Before Installation Ver. 4.0 Environmental Condition The table below lists the environmental conditions and related standards such as operational temperature and humidity. Category Range Temperature Condition a)
-40~122F (-40~+50C) Humidity Condition a) 5~100 %, condensing, not to exceed 30 g/m3 absolute humidity Altitude Vibration
-197~5,905 ft (-60~1,800 m) GR-487-CORE Sec.3.39
- Transportation shock
- Transportation vibration
- Installation shock
- Environmentally induced vibration
- Earthquake resistance Sound Pressure Level Under 65 dBA in height of 3 ft (1.0 m) and distance of 5 ft (1.5 m). EMI
- FCC Title 47 Part 15 Class B
- EN 301 489 Section 7.1 EMC emission
- GR-1089-CORE (Issue4) Sec. 3.2 Emission Criteria US Federal Regulation FCC Title 47 Part 27 a) The standards of temperature/humidity conditions are based on the value on the position where is 15.75 in. (400 mm) away from the front of the system and in the height of 4.92 ft (1.5 m) on the bottom. Environmental Alarm The table below lists the environmental alarm provided in the Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 in default. Category Standard Temperature Alarm High Temperature, Low Temperature Fan Fail Fan Fail Voltage Alarm High Voltage, Low Voltage 1-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual RF Specification The table below lists the RF characteristics of the RRH-B4. Category Standard Total Tx Output Power
- Mobile WiMAX, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth 20 W @ avg power per carrier/sector, 2T2R,2T4R,4T4R 10 W @ avg power per carrier/sector, 2T2R,2T4R,4T4R
- TD-LTE, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth 20 W @ avg power per carrier/sector, 2T2R,2T4R,4T4R 10 W @ avg power per carrier/sector, 2T2R,2T4R,4T4R Tx Constellation error
- Mobile WiMAX: In accordance with the 802.16e RCT standard
- TD-LTE: In accordance with the 3GPP LTE standard RX Sensitivity
- Mobile WiMAX: In accordance with the 802.16e RCT standard
- TD-LTE: In accordance with the 3GPP LTE standard SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-5 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 1. Before Installation Ver. 4.0 1.3 Cautions for Installation Observe the following safety instructions when installing the RRH-B4:
Before Installing Post warning signs in areas where high-voltage cables are installed. Post off limit signs in areas where accidents are most expected. With guardrails or fences, block open areas such as connecting parts, roof, and scaffold. While Installing The power must be cut off before installing. Be careful that boards mounted on the system and the cables among the boards are damaged or scratched when the system is transported or installed. Wearing Protective Gloves and Glasses The workers should wear the protective gloves and glasses because they can be injured by the debris generated when drilling holes on walls or ceilings. Do Not Wear Metal Things such as Watch, Ring, Etc. Do not let the electric short circuit occur due to metal things such as watch or ring. Warning for Workers Injury When installing cables in a small area, do not apply excessive force. Worker may bump against a wall or equipment. Do not Work by Yourself Worker must not work alone in any key process. Managing Unused Ports Never allow foreign substances to be inserted into unused ports by covering them with a dust cap. 1-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Finishing the Cable Inlet To prevent foreign substances, outdoor air and moisture from entering the cable inlet (including cable gland and conduit), finish it as follows:
- Unused inlet Use the hole finishing materials including dust cap and rubber packing.
- Cable-installed inlet After cable installation, block any space in the inlet with tape, compressed sponge, rubber packing, and silicon. Outdoor Fastening Materials The outdoor fastening materials such as stud bolts, hex. nuts, spring washers and plane washers must be made of stainless steel (STS 304). Otherwise, it may cause corrosion and rust to fixing materials. After Installing Cover the cable holes drilled on the floor with a solid cover. Remove any debris produced during the work and clean up the installation site. Warning for Laser Beam Running through Optical Cables In the system, the laser beam emitting light runs through the optical cable. The exposure of the laser beam on workers eye may cause serious injury so that it should be handled with care. Cautions while Cleaning the Rack Make sure that worker does not damage installed cables while cleaning the rack. Cautions while Cleaning Power Supply While cleaning the power supply device, take caution that the device does not come in contact with alien bodies that may cause power failure. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-7 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 1. Before Installation Ver. 4.0 1.4 Pre-survey To enable seamless construction, the installer and the service provider should perform pre-
construction inspection to examine and analyze the following items. Examination about the conformance and the economical efficiency of the place that the system is transported or installed. Status of external interfaces Power capacity and wiring status Possibility of system extension Review if the place has the enough space to operate and maintain. If there is a need for improvement or an issue, the installer and the service provider must discuss measures to resolve any issue arising. 1-8 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 1.5 Installation Tools The basic tools for installation are listed in the table below. The additional tools required for each site need to identified and prepared during a site survey before starting installation. Table 1.1 Basic Installation Tools No. Name 1 Torque driver set 2 Torque wrench set Specification No.0~+ No.3 (M2.6~M6 + Driver) 0.07~4.34 lbfft (1.0~60 kgf.cm) M6~M12 0.72~2.17 lbfft (10~30 kgf.cm), 7.23~36.15 lbfft (100~500 kgf.cm), Replaceable head Nut driver set 0.24~0.39 in. (6~10 mm) Hacksaw Frame/Blade Normal/HIS Level/Plumb bobs Normal/1.10 lb (500 g) Heating gun Torx Driver 122~572F (50~300C) T20H Power extension cable 98.42 ft (30 m) Tape measure Cable cutter 16.4 ft/164 ft (5 m/50 m) 12.8 in. (325 mm) Silicon gun/Silicon Normal/Gray & Colorless Spanner 0.75 in. 0.94 in. 1.42 in. (19 mm, 24 mm, 36 mm) Precautions when Using the Installation Tools:
The required installation tools may vary depending on the conditions at the site. In addition to the basic tools, a protractor, compass, GPS receiver, ladder, safety equipment, cleaning tools etc. should also be prepared in consideration of the site conditions. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-9 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 1. Before Installation Ver. 4.0 This page is intentionally left blank. 1-10 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual CHAPTER 2. Installing System 2.1 Installing the RRH-B4 The procedure to install the RRH-B4 is listed in the flow chart below. Foundation Work Unpacking and Transporting System Arrangement Marking and Drilling Importing Items Unpacking Items Fixing System System Leveling Installation Test Figure 2.1 Procedure to Install the RRH-B4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-1 2600-00F1W8GAA 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System Ver. 2.2 Foundation Work 2.2.1 System Arrangement A minimum distance must be secured around the RRH-B4, in each direction for installation and maintenance. Table 2.1 Recommended Distances for RRH-B4 Installation Category Front/Rear Side Recommended Distances 31.5 in. (800 mm) or more 23.62 in. (600 mm) or more Unit: in. (mm)
) 0 5 5
(
5 6 1 2
.
) 5 7 0 2
(
7 1 8
.
[Left View]
15.35 (390)
[Top View]
Figure 2.2 RRH-B4 Arragement (Wall Type) 2-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual
) 0 5 5
(
5 6
. 1 2 Unit: in. (mm)
) 0 0 3
(
1 8
. 1 1 13.78 (350) 5.57
(141.6)
[Front View]
[Top View]
Figure 2.3 RRH-B4 Arragement (Sector Pole Type) System Installation Spaces The space specifications in the figure above apply when the pole diameter is 3 in.
(76.3 mm). The dimensions may vary depending on the diameter of the pole. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-3 2600-00F1W8GAA 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System Ver. 2.2.2 Marking and Drilling Marking Before placing the system, mark the position where the system will be installed and also the positions where anchor bolts will be fixed using an ink line or a pen. Checking Marking (horizontal/vertical) When Mounting the System on Wall If you do the drilling or anchoring on a wall when the positions are not marked to be horizontal or vertical, only limited range of tuning is allowed for leveling after the system is mounted. To mount the system on a wall, perform the leveling test by referring to System Leveling to check the positions are marked to be horizontal or vertical before drilling. If the result shows they are not horizontal or vertical, modify the marking positions. Marking Using the System When the position where the system will be placed is determined, place the system on the position and then mark the positions where anchor bolts will be fixed using a pen. This will reduce marking error range caused by a worker. 10.49 (266.5) Unit: in. (mm)
) 0 5 5
(
5 6 1 2
.
) 5 0 4
(
4 9 5 1
. Anchor Bolt Hole ( 14) 8.17 (207.5)
[Rigt View]
Figure 2.4 System Marking-Wall Type 2-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Drilling When marking is completed, drill holes for anchor bolts. Table 2.2 Anchor Bolt Drill Bits and Hole Depth Category Anchor Bolt Drill Bits Hole Depth RRH-B4 (Wall Type) M12 0.67 in. (17 mm) 2.17 in. (55 mm) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-5 2600-00F1W8GAA 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System Ver. 2.3 Unpacking and Transporting This paragraph describes the work to unpack cabinets and other components and transport them to the place to be installed. The cabinet is externally packed and cabinet and other components are individually packed. The external packing must be unpacked in the outside. If necessary, the packing can be unpacked after transported into the area near installation place. Transport the cabinet to the installation place. Beware of the damage of walls, pillars, and bottom of the passage when transporting the cabinet. Transport other components with packing and sort by types. 2.3.1 Importing Items Bring in items, taking care of the followings:
Regarding equipment weight and size, check the path to bring the equipment. Lay Iron and veneer boards on stairs or doorsills to make the transportation easy. When bring in equipment, beware of damage or impairment of main entrance, walls, pillars, and floors of the station. Prepare protection materials and fix them with a high-
strength adhesive. Vibration Level for Transportation When carrying the system, tighten the system firmly not to exceed the proper vibration level from 1 to 500 Hz. When carrying system, use a cart or lift to prevent accidents. However, if the system must be carried by people, enough people are required to carry the system. Before moving the system, check the storage place for the system and remove obstacles in advance. While moving system, boards and other devices should not be shocked physically and damaged caused by dust, moisture, and static electricity. When installing the items imported, system must be installed in a location whose access is not easy from outside. 2.3.2 Unpacking Items The procedure to unpack items is as follows:
The packing items must be packed until they reach the installation place. The items are classified in accordance with each job specification and stored on a place that does not interfere with working. Unpacked systems must be installed immediately. If not installed immediately, the systems must be stored in the installation place temporarily. Unpack the inner packaging after each system is placed on its installation location. Do not recycle packaging waste. Dispose of it in accordance with waste management act. 2-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 2.4 Fixing System 2.4.1 Fixing Unit Mounting Bracket The procedure for fixing the unit mounting bracket is as follows:
Table 2.3 Unit Mounting Bracket Fixing Parts And Tool Classification Description Parts Unit Mounting Unit Mounting Bracket_Top 1 EA/1 Set Bracket Assy (1 Set) Unit Mounting Bracket_Bottom 1 EA/1 Set Bakelite_Top1 Bakelite_Top2 Bakelite_Bottom 1 EA/1 Set 1 EA/1 Set 1 EA/1 Set Fastener
- M8 Plane Washer 6 EA/1 Set
- M8 Spring Washer 6 EA/1 Set
- M8 25L Hex. Bolt 6 EA/1 Set
- Insulation Bushing 6 EA/1 Set Recommended M8 25L Hex. Bolt 5.96~8.94 lbf.ft (82.4~123.6 kgf.cm) Torque Value Working Tools Torque W rench and Level Checking Top/Bottom When Fixing Unit Mount Bracket To install the system accurately, fix the unit mounting brackets by distinguishing its top and bottom as shown below. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-7 2600-00F1W8GAA 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System Ver. 1) Place the bakelite-top 1, 2 and unit mounting bracket_top to the RRH-B4's top fixing holes and fix these firmly with fasteners. 2) Place the bakelite-bottom and unit mounting bracket_bottom to the RRH-B4's bottom fixing holes and fix these firmly with fasteners. Bakelite_Top 1 Bakelite_Top 2 Unit Mounting Bracket_Top M8 Insulation Bushing M8 Plane Washer M8 Spring Washer M8 25L Hex. Bolt Bakelite-Bottom Unit Mounting Bracket_Bottom M8 Insulation Bushing M8 Plane Washer M8 Spring Washer M8 25L Hex. Bolt 3.13 in.
(79.5 mm) 2.24 in.
(57 mm) Left Right
[Unit Mounting Bracket_Bottom]
Figure 2.5 Fixing Unit Mounting Bracket 2-8 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 2.4.2 Fixing RRH-B4 RRH-B4 can be fixed to the wall or pole. Fixing RRH-B4 (Wall Type) The procedure for fixing the RRH-B4 to the wall is as follows:
Table 2.4 RRH-B4 Fixing Parts and Tools (Wall Type) Classification Description Parts Fastener M10 Anchor Bolt Assy 4 Set
- M10 Anchor Bolt 1 EA/Set
- M10 Plane Washer 1 EA/Set
- M10 Spring Washer 1 EA/Set
- M10 Hex. Nut 1 EA/Set Recommended Torque Value M10 Hex. Nut 12.03~18.05 lbf.ft
(166.4~249.6 kgf.cm) Working Tools Drill, Hammer, Torque W rench and Level Cautions When Using Wall Mount Fasteners The fasteners such as anchor bolt, spring washer, plane washer and hex. nut used to fix the system to a wall must be made of stainless steel (STS 304). Otherwise, it may cause corrosion and rust to fasteners. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-9 2600-00F1W8GAA 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System Ver. Fix unit mounting bracket_top and unit mounting bracket_bottom (attached to the RRH-B4) to the wall with fasteners. M10 Anchor Bolt Unit Mounting Bracket_Top M10 Plane Washer M10 Spring Washer M10 Hex. Nut RRH-B4 Unit Mounting Bracket_Top Unit Mounting Bracket_Bottom Figure 2.6 Fixing RRH-B4 (Wall Type) 2-10 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Fixing RRH-B4 (Pole Type) The procedure for fixing the RRH-B4 to the pole is as follows:
Table 2.5 RRH-B4 Fixing Parts and Tools (Pole Type) Classification Parts Rear Bracket Description 2 EA Fastener
- M12 Hex. Bolt 4 EA/set
- M12 Plane Washer 4 EA/set
- M12 Spring Washer 4 EA/set
- M12 Hex. Nut 4 EA/set Recommended M12 Hex. Nut 21.11~31.67 lbf.ft (292.0~438.0 kgf.cm) Torque Value Working Tools Torque W rench Cautions When Using Pole Fasteners The fasteners such as hex. bolt, hex. nut, spring washer, and plane washer used to fix the system to a pole must be made of stainless steel (STS 304). Otherwise, it may cause corrosion and rust to fasteners. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-11 2600-00F1W8GAA 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System Ver. Place the RRH-B4 (attaching unit mounting bracket_top, bottom) to the pole front, place the rear bracket to the pole rear, and fix these firmly with fasteners. Pole
[ 3~4.5 in. ( 76.3~114.3 mm)]
Unit Mounting Bracket_Top M12 180L Hex. Bolt Rear Bracket M12 Plane Washer M12 Spring Washer M12 Hex. Nut Unit Mounting Bracket_Bottom Rear Bracket Left 5.69 in.
(144.5 mm) 4.8 in.
(122 mm) Right Rear Bracket Figure 2.7 Fixing RRH-B4 (Pole Type) 2-12 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual How to lift up RRH-B4 When lifting up the RRH-B4 for installation, after fixing the unit mounting bracket of RRH-B4 side, bind the rope to the heat sink of RRH-B4 and a space between unit mounting bracket_top and RRH-B4, lift up using a hoist lift as shown below. For the safety, maintain the status of lifting up by completing RRH-B4 installation. Unbind the rope after the installation is complete. Hoist Line Rope RRH-B4 Unit Mounting Bracket_Top SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-13 2600-00F1W8GAA 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System Ver. 2.5 System Leveling Leveling refers to compensating for the level difference on the floor that is generated during floor work to install devices horizontally or vertically. Leveling can be carried out using a vinyl hose, a balance weight, or a level. In this manual, a commonly used method, which uses a spirit level, is described. Leveling Using a Level Leveling method using a level is as follows:
Table 2.6 Leveling Using a Level Classification Description Test method The level is measured based on the position of a bubble after attaching the spirit level to the top and side of the system. Evaluation criteria Good Poor If it is leveled, the bubble of the spirit level is positioned at the center of both lines. Corrective Use an aid such as bakelite on the back side of the system or an auxiliary measures for poor fixture to adjust the height. leveling Adjust the position of fasteners used to fix the system or its leveling status.
[Measuring Horizontal Position]
[Measuring Vertical Position]
Figure 2.8 Leveling Using a Level (Example) 2-14 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 2.6 Insulation Test Insulation test procedure is as follows:
Table 2.7 Insulation Test Classification Description Test method The insulation tester (Megger) is used for measurement. Position of lead Wall Type Lead line_A Bracket fixing anchor bolt line of insulation tester Lead line_B Systems screw Pole Type Lead line_A Bracket fixing Hex. Bolt. Lead line_B Systems screw Good Poor 500 V/100 M or more Less than 500 V/100 M Evaluation criteria Corrective
- Check the contact between the system and anchor bolt and re-assemble it. measures for
(But, the anchor bolt must be shielded using an insulator such as an insulation poor leveling bushing, etc.)
- Check damage of an insulator such as an insulation busing or bakelite, etc. and replace it. Cautions When Using Insulation Tester Pay attention to the followings to prevent any personal injury caused by an electric shock when using an insulation tester.
- Make sure the polarity is correct when connecting the Earth COM (black) and AC.V (red) lead lines. And do not touch the connected probes inspecting part of the lead line) with a hand and avoid body contact.
- Avoid body contact to the system when measuring an insulation resistance. Probe
(Inspecting part of the lead line) Precautions While Measuring Insulation Resistance Observe the followings to prevent any system damage when measuring insulation resistance because there is a very high voltage.
- Before measuring insulation resistance, disconnect all the cables connected to the system.
- Do not measure insulation resistance when power is on.
- Do not measure insulation resistance at any other positions such as system internal units or parts other than the targeted insulation resistance measuring points. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-15 2600-00F1W8GAA 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System Ver.
[Megger]
[Bracket Fixing Anchor Bolt]
[Systems screw]
Figure 2.9 Schematic Diagram for Insulation Test (Wall Type)
[Megger]
[Bracket Fixing Hex.Bolt]
[Systems screw]
Figure 2.10 Schematic Diagram for Insulation Test (Pole Type) 2-16 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 3.1 Work Flow for Cabling The cable workflow for the system is as follows:
Grounding Power Cabling External Interface Cabling CPRI Cable Connection RET/RF Cable Connection Figure 3.1 Work Flow for System Cabling SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-1 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 The detailed procedure of cabling is as follows:
Cable Path Inspection Cable Cutting Cable Installation Cable Binding Connector Attachment When assembling the connector at the site Connector Assembly Identification Tag Attachment Figure 3.2 Detailed Cabling Procedure Considerations when Cutting the Cable after Installation When cutting the cable after installation, make sure that the connector is disconnected. Installation of the cable with the connector connected to the system may cause contact failure or damage to the connector assembled to the system and the cable due to cable tension or the operators mistakes. Cabling Workflow The sequence of cable cutting and installation of the cable workflow can be changed depending on the field situation such as cutting after installing or installing after cutting. Cable Path Inspection When installing a cable that connects between the rectifier, Main Ground Bar (MGB), and backhaul device, etc. within the system, the cable path length and the cable installation method, etc. must be inspected. Follow these guidelines when inspecting the cabling path. A minimum cable length must be selected provided that it does not affect the cable installation and maintenance. The cable must be placed in a location where it will not be damaged by external factors. (power line, flooding, footpaths, etc.) In areas where the cable may be damaged by external factors, ensure that measures are taken to prevent damage to the cable. (cable tray, ducts, flexible pipe, etc.) 3-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Cable Cutting Measure the exact distance, carefully checking the route, and cut the cable using a cutting tool. Follow these guidelines when cutting the cable. Cut the cable to the length determined in the Cable Path Inspection step. Use a dedicated cable cutting tool. Cut the cable at right angles. Be careful to keep the cable away from any moisture, iron, lead, dust or other foreign material when cutting. Remove any foreign material attached to the cable using solvent and a brush. Cable Installation Cable installation involves running the cable along the cabling path to the target connector of the system or an auxiliary device after cable path inspection and cable cutting have been completed. Follow these guidelines when installing a cable. Be careful not to damage the cable. If the cable is damaged, cut out the damaged section before installing. When installing the cable over other cables, make sure the cable is installed on the other cables. Pay more attention to the vertical and horizontal cross sections where the cables are usually reversed. Always use the maximum curvature radius possible, and make sure that the minimum curvature radius specification is complied with. If the cable needs to be protected, use a PVC channel, spiral sleeve, flexible pipe, and cable tray, etc. Table 3.1 Recommended Minimum Allowed Cable Bend Radius No Type Allowed Cable Bend Radius Remark 1 F-GV/F-CV/F-FR-8 8 times of the cable external diameter 0.6/1 KV Cable 2 Optic Cable 20 times of the cable external diameter
-
3 UTP/FTP/S-FTP Cable 4 times of the cable external diameter PVC/LSZH, 4 Pair 4 5 6 7 8 9 1/2 in. Feeder Line (Indoor) 1/2 in. Feeder Line (Outdoor) 7/8 in. Feeder Line (Outdoor) 1.26 in. (32 mm) 4.92 in. (125 mm) 9.84 in. (250 mm) 1-1/4 in. Feeder Line (Outdoor) 14.96 in. (380 mm) 1-5/8 in. Feeder Line (Outdoor) 19.69 in. (500 mm) LMR-400 1 in. (25.4 mm) 4 in. (101.6 mm) RFS, LS RFS, LS RFS, LS RFS, LS RFS, LS Installation Repeated 10 RG-316D 0.59 in. (15 mm)
-
If the allowed cable bend radius is specified by the manufacturer, comply with the bend radius specified. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-3 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 Cable Binding Cable binding involves fixing and arranging an installed cable using binding thread, cable ties, binding wire, and ram clamps, etc. Follow these guidelines when binding a cable. Be careful not to damage the cable during binding. Use appropriate cable binding tools according to the target location (indoor or outdoor, etc.) and the use of the cable (power supply cable, optical cable, feeder line, etc.). Do not let the cutting section of a cable tie and binding line, etc. be exposed to the outside. This may cause damage to cables or personal injury. Make sure that the cutting sections of cables are not exposed to the outside. Trim the cable binding cord at about 5 cm (1.97 in.) distance from its knob and insert it into the knot so that the knot does not loosen. If there is a danger that contact failure may occur in a connector connection due to tension, install the cable as short as possible. Assembling and Connecting Connectors Connector connection involves assembling a connector to an installed cable and connecting the assembled connector to a device. Follow these guidelines when assembling and connecting connectors. Make sure you are fully aware of the connector assembly method before assembling a connector. Assemble the connector in accordance with its pin map. Each connector has a hook to prevent its core positions from being changed. Check the corresponding grooves before connecting a connector to another connector. Use a heat shrink tube at a connector connection for cables that are installed outdoor, such as feeder lines, to prevent water leakage and corrosion from occurring at the part exposed to the outside. Connect each cable of the connector assembly in a straight line. Be careful when connecting a cable so that contact failure does not occur at a connector connection due to tension. Identification Tag Attachment Identification tag attachment involves attaching a marker cable tie, nameplate, and label, etc. to the both ends of a cable (connections to a connector) to identify its use and cabling path. Marker Cable Tie On the marker cable tie, a label can be attached. The appearance and specification may differ depending on the type and manufacturer. 3-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Follow these guidelines when attaching an identification tag. When installing a cable outdoor, use relief engraving and coated labels, etc. to prevent the markings from being erased. Since the form and attachment method for identification tags are different for each provider, consult with the provider before attaching them. Connecting Ground Cable When connecting the cables, always connect the ground cable first. If worker contacts the equipment, connect a cable or perform maintenance without connecting the ground cable, the system can be damaged or a worker may be injured due to static electricity and short circuit. Management of Unused Ports Cover the unused ports (conduit, cable gland, etc.) with waterproof cap (sealing cap) to prevent infiltration of foreign material such as dust, moisture, or bug. Cable Installation Checklist When installing, take care not to overlap or tangle the cables; also, consider future expansion. Install the DC power cable and data transmission cable away from the AC power cable to prevent electromagnetic induction. Cable Works The cable works require the knowledge for the cabling works such as cable install ation/tying. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-5 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 3.2 Cabling The cabling diagram of the RRH-B4 is as follows:
[Rectifier]
[Smart MBS UADU]
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU]
[RF Antenna]
5) CPRI Cable 6) RET Cable 7) RF Cable l e b a C d n u o r G e n L i r e d e e F l e b a C r e w o P
) 4 l e b a C d n u o r G 4 B H R R
-
) 3
[MGB]
) e n L i r e d e e F
. n i 8
/
7
/
t i K d n u o r G g n s U n e h W i
(
1) MGB Ground Cable
[TGB]
2) TGB Ground Cable TGB and Ground Kit are used when using the 7/8 in. feeder line or more. Figure 3.3 Cabling Diagram 3-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Table 3.2 RRH-B4 Connection Cable From To Cable Underground MGB (Main Ground Bar) 1) MGB Ground Cable ground
: AWG4/0, F-GV 95 mm2 1C
(However, this can be changed depending on the standards of each provider.) TGB (Tower Ground Bar) 2) TGB Ground Cable
: AWG2, F-GV 35 mm2 1C
(However, this can be changed depending on the standards of each provider.) RRH-B4 MGB 3) RRH-B4 Ground Cable
: AWG8, F-GV 6 mm2 1C Rectifier 4) Power Cable
: AWG10, F-CV 4 mm2 2C
(or AW G8, F-CV 6 mm2 2C) Smart MBS UADU 5) CPRI Cable U-RAS Flexible V2 DU
: Optic Cable (Single Mode) RF Antenna 6) RET Cable Assy (Using Shield Cable) 7) RF Cable
: 1/2 in. or 7/8 in. Feeder Line SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-7 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 3.3 Grounding Grounding is required for protecting complex electronic or electric systems such as power system, communication system, and control system from lightning, over-current, over-
voltage, and electric noise. Thus, the systems can operate properly and protect human life from electrical shock. Ground equipment minimizes the electrical potential of the electronic device to that of the ground, which is zero electrical potential, so that it can prevent the device from occurring electrification. The purposes of the ground construction are as follows:
To prevent human life and the system from over-current, over-voltage, and lightning To provide a discharge path for surge voltage generated by lightning and power switch To protect the system from static electricity To eliminate or minimize the high-frequency potential in the system housing To provide a conductor for the balance and stability of high-frequency current To stabilize the potential of the circuit against the ground Connecting Ground Cable In cabling, the connection of cables without the connection to the ground cable may cause the damage of the equipment or the bodily injury of the worker. Connect the ground cable first. System Grounding Method Ground bar for lightning protector/power/communication must be isolated from each other. These three ground bars can be grounded as the isolation grounding method, or branched from ground mesh buried in the underground as common grounding method. Ground Bar for Power Ground Bar for Power Ground Bar for Communication Ground Bar for Lightning Protector Ground Bar for Communication Ground Bar for Lightning Protector Underground Underground
[Isolation Grounding]
[Common Grounding]
3-8 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 3.3.1 Grounding the System The way to connect the ground cable of RRH-B4 is as follows:
Table 3.3 Grounding the RRH-B4 (MGB~RRH-B4) Classification Description Installation Section MGB~RRH-B4 Grounding Terminal Cable AW G8, F-GV 6 mm2 1C Heat Shrink Tube 0.39 in. (10 mm)/Green/1.96 in. (50 mm)
(Spec/Color/Length) Pressure Terminal MGB Checking MGB specifications per site and preparing fasteners RRH-B4 AW G8 (6 mm2), 2 Hole, Hole Dia.: 1/4 in. (6.35 mm), Hole Space: 0.63 in. (16 mm) Fastener MGB Checking MGB specifications per site and preparing fasteners RRH-B4 M6 10L SEMS/2 EA Recommended M6 SEMS 5.96~8.94 lbf.ft (82.4~123.6 kgf.cm) Torque Value Working Tools Cable Cutter, Wire Stripper, Compressor, Heating Gun, Torque Driver (+), Torque W rench, Nipper Pressure Terminal for Grounding As for the pressure terminal or the cable, the UL certified products or equivalent should be used. Ex) Manufacturer: Panduit RRH-B4: AWG8 (6 mm2) Pressure Terminal (LCD8-14AF-L) Assembling a Pressure Terminal and a Heat Shrink Tube Refer to the ANNEX F to see how to assemble a pressure terminal and a heat shrink tube to a cable. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-9 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 1) Install the ground cable from the MGB to the RRH-B4 ground terminal. 2) Assemble a pressure terminal and a heat shrink tube at the end of the RRH-B4 ground cable. 3) Align the pressure terminal assembled to a ground cable to the mounting hole of the RRH -B4 ground terminal. 4) Firmly fix the pressure terminal onto the RRH-B4 ground terminal using fasteners. RRH-B4 A Ground Cable(AWG8, F-GV 6 mm2 1C) Detail A AWG8 (6 mm2) Pressure Terminal
(2 Hole, 90, hole dia.: 1/4 in., hole space: 0.63 in.) Heat Shrink Tube (Green) M6 10L SEMS Power Cable Bracket Ground Cable (AWG8, F-GV 6 mm2 1C) From MGB (Main Ground Bar) Figure 3.4 Connection of the RRH-B4 Ground Cable 3-10 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 3.4 Power Cabling The power supply device consists of the followings, including an AC distributor and rectifier. Commercial Power AC Distributor AC Rectifier DC System Battery Figure 3.5 Power Equipment Diagram Turning Off the Circuit Breaker before Connecting the Power Cable Since power is applied to the system where the power cable is connected by manipulating the circuit breaker of the rectifier, be sure to check the rectifiers breaker is turned off (open) before connecting the power cable to the power connector. If the system is installed while the circuit breaker is on, the worker may be critically injured as soon as the cable is connected in the wrong way. When Using Power Cables
- W hen handling the power cable, ensure the power switch of a rectifier is turned off to prevent the risk from the power cable and electric short-circuit of related cables.
- Because a power accident may occur when fixing parts get loosened, make sure that fasteners to fix the power cable should be firmly fastened. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-11 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 3.4.1 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable 3.4.1.1 When Using the Power Cable (AWG8) Follow the steps below to connect the RRH-B4 power cable when using power cable
(AWG8). Table 3.4 Connecting the DC Power Cable (AWG8, DC Distributor~ RRH-B4) Classification Description Installation Section DC Distributor~RRH-B4 power input terminal Cable Heat Shrink Tube
(Spec/Color/Length)
-48 V RTN
-48 V RTN AW G8, F-CV, 6 mm2 2C Black Red 0.3 in. (8 mm)/Blue/1.18 in. (30 mm) 0.3 in. (8 mm)/Red/1.18 in. (30 mm) Pressure Terminal DC Distributor Check the specification of DC distributor output terminal and prepare fasteners. RRH-B4 AW G8 (6 mm2), Ring Type, Hole Dia.: 0.2 in. (5.3 mm) Fastener DC Distributor Check the specification of DC distributor output terminal and prepare fasteners. RRH-B4 DC Power Input Terminal M5 SEMS/2 EA Recommended Cable Gland 1.81 lbf.ft (25.0 kgf.cm) Torque Value (kgf.cm) M5 SEMS 1.45~2.17 lbf.ft (20.0~30.0 kgf.cm) Torx Screw 0.87 lbf.ft (12.0 kgf.cm) Working Tools Cable Cutter, Wire Stripper, Compressor, Heating Gun, Torque Driver (+), Torque W rench, Nipper, Torx Driver Pressure Terminal for Power As for the pressure terminal or the cable, the UL certified products or equivalent should be used. Ex) Manufacturer-Spec-Kon RRH-B4: AWG8, Pressure Terminal (K8-10R-D) 3-12 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Circuit Breaker Installation To supply stable power to the system, a circuit breaker must be installed to a power supplier. The capacity of -48 VDC circuit breaker is 32 A. Assembling a Pressure Terminal and a Heat Shrink Tube Refer to the ANNEX F to see how to assemble a pressure terminal and a heat shrink tube to a cable. Tools to Tighten Stainless Steel Tie It is recommended to use the following tools or their equivalents to tighten the stainless steel tie that is used to fix an external power cable support bracket and a power cable. Ex) Manufacture-Dong A bestech Part No: DAS 250 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-13 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 Disassembling the Cover of RRH-B4 Power Window Open the power window at the rear bottom of RRH-B4 by loosening the Torx screws for fixing cover with a Torx driver (T20). Power Window Cover Cover Fixing Torx Screw(T20) 3-14 Figure 3.6 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable 1) Install power cable up to the power port of RRH-B4, referring to the Cautions When Installing Power Cable. 2) Cut the power cable installed to the power port, strip the cable sheath, and strip the core wire. 3) Insert a heat shrink tube to each core, and install the compression terminal and compressing it. 4) Place the heat shrink tube on the pressure terminal assembly (-48 V: blue, RTN: red), and shrink it using a heating gun. DC Power Cable
(AWG8) 0.58~0.6 in.
(14.7~15.4mm) 1.77 in. (45 mm) DC Power Cable
(AWG8) DC Power Cable
(AWG8) 0.39 in.(10 mm) 1.38 in. (35 mm) RTN
-48 V 0.59 in.
(15 mm) Figure 3.7 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-15 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 Precautions When Connecting Power Cable To secure rainproof performance of a cable gland, min. 11.81 in. (300 mm) straight section must be maintained. Here, the radius of curvature must be considered according to the cable specification. Stainless Steel Band or Cable Tie 11.81 in. (300 mm) or more 11.81 in. (300 mm) 11.81 in. (300 mm) Precautions When Cutting Power Cable Install the power cable to the power port of system by considering the radius of curvature of its cable specification and then cut the cable. If you install the cable after cutting, there may be length difference among the core wires at the end of the cable because of cable curvature. This may result in poor contact after the cable is connected to the power port. 3-16 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 5) Remove the protection cap of power terminal. RTN
-48 V M5 SEMS Protection Cap of Power Terminal Figure 3.8 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (3) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-17 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 6) Remove the rain-proof filler and the cable gland nut from the cable gland for power cable input at the bottom of RRH-B4. 7) Insert the rain-proof filler and the cable gland nut removed from the 1 power cable (AWG8, F-CV 6 mm2 2C). 8) Pass the power cable though the cable gland at the bottom of the RRH -B4, and install it inside the power window.
-48 V RTN Power Cable Bracket Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Pressure Terminal Heat Shrink Tube
(-48 V: Blue, RTN: Red) Cable Gland Body Power Cable Power Cable Bracket Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Figure 3.9 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (4) 3-18 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 9) Place the pressure terminal installed to the power cable according to the polarity of the power terminal block, and fix it with fasteners. RTN
-48 V Pressure Terminal M5 SEMS Heat Shrink Tube
(-48 V: Blue, RTN: Red) Protection Cap of Power Terminal Power Cable
(-48 V: Black, RTN: Red) Figure 3.10 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (5) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-19 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 10) Fully insert the rain-proof filler to the cable gland body, and tighten the cable gland nut using a torque wrench with torque value 2.17 lbf.ft (30 kgf.cm).
-48 V RTN Rain-proof Gasket Protection Cap of Power Terminal Power Cable Bracket Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Protrusion of Rain-Proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Power Cable Outer Jacket
(AWG8) Figure 3.11 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (6) Caution for Rain-proof Gasket Damage Be careful the rain-proof gasket is not damaged during work, and check again the gasket is not damaged before closing power/DTA window cover. If the rain-proof gasket is damaged, replace the RRH-B4. 3-20 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 11) Close the power window, and tighten the Torx screws with a torque driver (T20) with torque value 0.87 lbf.ft (12 kgf.cm). Tightening order is
. 12) Fix the RRH-B4 power cable and the power cable bracket using a stainless steel tie. Torque Driver Power Window Cover Cover Fixing Torx Screw (T20) Stainless Steel Tie Power Cable Bracket Power Cable
(AWG 8, F-CV 6 mm2 2C) Figure 3.12 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (7) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-21 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 Check When Fixing the Power Cable Fix the power cable and the power cable bracket using a stainless steel tie for preventing loose contact due to cable tension and leakage problems. It is recommended to use the designated tools to tighten the stainless steel tie. 3.4.1.2 When Using the Power Cable (AWG10) Follow the steps below to connect the RRH-B4 power cable when using power cable
(AWG10). Table 3.5 Connecting the DC Power Cable (AWG10, DC Distributor~RRH-B4) Classification Description Installation Section DC Distributor~RRH-B4 power input terminal Cable
-48 V RTN AW G10, F-CV 4 mm2 2C Black Red Heat Shrink Tube
-48 V 0.3 in. (8 mm)/Blue/1.18 in. (30 mm)
(Spec/Color/Length) RTN 0.3 in. (8 mm)/Red/1.18 in. (30 mm) Pressure Terminal DC Distributor Check the specification of DC distributor output terminal and prepare fasteners. RRH-B4 AW G10 (4 mm2), Ring Type, Hole Dia.: 0.2 in. (5.3 mm) Fastener DC Distributor Check the specification of DC distributor output terminal and prepare fasteners. RRH-B4 DC Power Input Terminal M5 SEMS/2 EA Recommended Cable Gland 1.74 lbf.ft (25.0 kgf.cm) Torque Value (kgf.cm) M5 SEMS 1.45~2.17 lbf.ft (20.0~30.0 kgf.cm) Torx Screw 0.83 lbf.ft (12.0 kgf.cm) Working Tools Cable Cutter, Wire Stripper, Compressor, Heating Gun, Torque Driver
(+, T20), Torque W rench, Nipper, Driver (+, T20) 3-22 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Pressure Terminal for Power As for the pressure terminal or the cable, the UL certified products or equivalent should be used. Ex) Manufacturer-Donga bestech RRH-B4: AWG10 (4 mm2) Pressure Terminal (PTSR0306) Circuit Breaker Installation To supply stable power to the system, a circuit breaker must be installed to a power supplier. The capacity of -48 VDC circuit breaker is 32 A. Assembling a Pressure Terminal and a Heat Shrink Tube Refer to the ANNEX F to see how to assemble a pressure terminal and a heat shrink tube to a cable. Tools to Tighten Stainless Steel Tie It is recommended to use the following tools or their equivalents to tighten the stainless steel tie that is used to fix an external power cable support bracket and a power cable. Ex) Manufacture-Dong A bestech Part No: DAS 250 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-23 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 Disassembling the Cover of RRH-B4 Power Window Open the power window on the rear bottom of the RRH-B4 by loosening the cover fixing Torx screws with a Torx driver (T20). Power Window Cover Cover Fixing Torx Screw (T20) 3-24 Figure 3.13 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable 1) Install power cable up to the power port of RRH-B4, referring to the Cautions When Installing Power Cable. 2) Cut the power cable installed to the power port, strip the cable sheath, and strip the core wire. 3) Insert a heat shrink tube to each core, and install the compression terminal and compressing it. 4) Place the heat shrink tube on the pressure terminal assembly (-48 V: blue, RTN: red), and shrink it using a heating gun. 5) Insert a heat shrink tube(jelly type, black) to the part, which the external sheath is removed, and shrink it using a heating gun. DC Power Cable
(AWG10) 0.45~0.49 in.
(11.5~12.4 mm) 1.38 in. (35 mm) DC Power Cable
(AWG10) DC Power Cable
(AWG10) 0.39 in. (10 mm) 0.98 in. (25 mm) RTN
-48 V 0.59 in.
(15 mm) Heat Shrink Tube
(Jelly Type, 12/4, Black) 0.98 in. (25 mm) Figure 3.14 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-25 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 Precautions When Connecting Power Cable To secure rainproof performance of a cable gland, min. 11.81 in. (300 mm) straight section must be maintained. Here, the radius of curvature must be considered according to the cable specification. Stainless Steel Band or Cable Tie 11.81 in. (300 mm) or more 11.81 in. (300 mm) 11.81 in. (300 mm) Precautions When Cutting Power Cable Install the power cable to the power port of system by considering the radius of curvature of its cable specification and then cut the cable. If you install the cable after cutting, there may be length difference among the core wires at the end of the cable because of cable curvature. This may result in poor contact after the cable is connected to the power port. 6) Remove the protection cap of power terminal. RTN
-48 V M5 SEMS Protection Cap of Power Teminal Figure 3.15 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (3) 3-26 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 7) Remove the rain-proof filler and the cable gland nut from the cable gland for power cable input at the bottom of RRH-B4. 8) Insert the rain-proof filler and the cable gland nut removed from the 1 power cable (AWG10, F-CV 4 mm2 2C). 9) Pass the power cable though the cable gland at the bottom of the RRH -B4, and install it inside the power window.
-48 V RTN Power Cable Bracket Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Pressure Terminal Heat Shrink Tube
(-48 V: Blue, RTN:Red) Cable Gland Body Power Cable Power Cable Bracket Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Figure 3.16 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (4) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-27 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 10) Place the pressure terminal installed to the power cable according to the polarity of the power terminal block, and fix it with fasteners. RTN
-48 V Pressure Terminal M5 SEMS Heat Shrink Tube
(-48 V: Blue, RTN: Red) Protection Cap of Power Terminal Power Cable
(-48 V: Black, RTN: Red) Figure 3.17 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (5) 3-28 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 11) Fully insert the rain-proof filler to the cable gland body, and tighten the cable gland nut using a torque wrench with torque value 2.17 lbf.ft (30 kgf.cm).
-48 V RTN Rain-proof Gasket Protection Cap of Power Terminal Power Cable Bracket Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Protrusion of Rain-Proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Heat Shrink Tube
(Jelly type, 12/4) 0.39 in. (10 mm) DC Power Cable Outer Jacket
(AWG10, F-CV 4 mm2 2C, 0.45~0.49 in./ 11.5~12.4 mm) Figure 3.18 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (6) Caution for Rain-proof Gasket Damage Be careful the rain-proof gasket is not damaged during work, and check again the gasket is not damaged before closing power/DTA window cover. If the rain-proof gasket is damaged, replace the RRH-B4. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-29 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 12) Close the power window, and tighten the Torx screws with a torque driver (T20) with torque value 0.87 lbf.ft (12 kgf.cm). Tightening order is
. 13) Fix the RRH-B4 power cable and the power cable bracket using a stainless steel tie. Torque Driver Power Window Cover Cover Fixing Torx Screw (T20) Stainless Steel Tie Power Cable Bracket Power Cable
(AWG 10, F-CV 4 mm2 2C) Figure 3.19 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (7) 3-30 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Check When Fixing the Power Cable Fix the power cable and the power cable bracket using a stainless steel tie for preventing loose contact due to cable tension and leakage problems. It is recommended to use the designated tools to tighten the stainless steel tie. 3.4.2 Power Test Perform the power test of the system for the following areas. Power cable connection stability check Check the power cable connection for the power source such as a rectifier and verify if the power cable is securely tightened into the RRH-B4 input terminal. Supply voltage of the power source Use a digital voltage meter to check if the power supplied is within the allowed input voltage range of the RRH-B4. (Rated input voltage: -48 V, Allowed input voltage:
-40~-56 V) Power on/off test Turn the power switch on/off to check if the system operates normally. Power Window Cover Be sure to check the circuit breaker for RRH-B4 is turned off before opening or closing the power window cover. If the cover is open or close while the circuit breaker is on, the system can be damaged or a worker may be critically injured due to electrical short-circuit. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-31 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 3.5 External Interface Construction 3.5.1 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection Consider the following cases when connecting the CPRI cable (RRH-4 interface). For U-RAS Flexible V2: WiMAX+TD-LTE Multi-Mode (Case #1~Case #3) For Smart MBS: TD-LTE (Case #1 and Case #2) For stacking between U-RAS Flexible V2 (WiMAX) and Smart MBS
(Case #1~Case #3) Warning for Laser Beam Running through Optical Cables In the system, the laser beam emitting light runs through the optical cable. The exposure of the laser beam on workers eye may cause serious injury so that it should be handled with care. Connecting the Optic Cable Before connecting the optical cable, check if the cutting section of the connector core is soiled. Be careful to keep the cutting section away from dust or foreign material. If the cable is soiled with foreign material, do not blow to remove them. Make sure to clean the connector in accordance with the cleaning directions for the optic cable. Refer the ANNEX D. Table 3.6 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection Classification Description Installation Section DU (UADU)~RRH-B4 Cable Optic Cable (Single Mode, for Outdoor) Connector DU RRH-B4 LC/PC LC/PC Working Tools Nipper, Optic Connector Cleaner, Torque Driver (T20), Torx Driver (T20) Blue Orange Green Brown Slate (Gray) White Red Black Figure 3.20 Specifications of CPRI Cable and Connector 3-32 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Follow the steps below to connect the interface (CPRI) cable. Disassembling the Cover of RRH-B4 DTA Window 1) Open the DTA window on the bottom left of the RRH -B4 by loosening the cover fixing screws with a Torx driver (T20). DTA Window Cover Cover Fixing Screw (T20) Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) Figure 3.21 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-33 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 2) Remove the cable gland nut and the rain-proof filler from the optic cable gland (M25) at the left bottom of RRH-B4. 3) Insert the cable gland nut cable and then the rain-proof filler to the RRH-B4 interface (CPRI) cable. Place the rain-proof filler top-end on the end of heat shrink tube. Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Heat Shrink Tube End of Heat Shrink Tube RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable End of Heat Shrink Tube Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut RRH-B4 Interface
(CPRI) Cable Figure 3.22 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (2) 3-34 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 4) Insert the RRH-B4 interface (CPRI) cable from the bottom of the RRH-B4 through the optic cable gland and install it inside the DTA window. 5) Fully insert the rain-proof filler to the cable gland body, and tighten the cable gland nut using a torque wrench with torque value 2.17 lbf.ft (25 kgf.cm). 6) Connect the RRH-B4 interface (CPRI) optic connector to the SFP module
, in order of figure 3.24. (See the cable color of figure 3.20.) Cable Gland Nut RRH-B4 interface(CPRI) Cable Bending radius: 0.79 in.(20 mm) Group Tube Heat Shrink Tube 0.59 in. (15 mm) 0.79 in. (20 mm) Figure 3.23 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (3) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-35 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 Figure 3.24 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (4) 3-36 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 7) Close the DTA window cover, and tighten the screws using a torque driver (T20) with torque value 0.87 lbf.ft (12 kgf.cm). Rain-proof Gasket Torque Driver DTA Window Cover Cover Fixing Screw (T20) Figure 3.25 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (5) Caution for Rain-proof Gasket Damage Be careful the rain-proof gasket is not damaged during work, and check again the gasket is not damaged before closing power/DTA window cover. If the rain-proof gasket is damaged, replace the RRH-B4. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-37 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 3.5.1.1 For U-RAS Flexible V2: WiMAX + TD-LTE Multi-Mode Consider the following cases when connecting the CPRI cable (RRH-4 interface) for WiMAX + TD-LTE multi-mode. Case #1: WiMAX+TD-LTE, 2Tx/2Rx Follow the steps below to connect CPRI cables for 2Tx/2Rx configuration of the U-RAS Flexible V2. Table 3.7 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1) DU Port Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) RRH-B4 MRA-F #0 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #3 MRA-L L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 A0 A1 A2 A3 B0 B1 B2 B3 C0 C1 C2 C3 Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #0
-
Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #1
-
Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #2
-
White (LC5)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
NC NC RRH-B4 #0 or #1 or #2 RRH-B4 #0 Blue (LC0) RRH-B4 #1
-
NC NC Blue (LC0) RRH-B4 #2
-
NC NC 3-38 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual A0 A1 A2 A3 B0 B1 B2 B3 C0 C1 C2 C3 L0 L0 L0 L0 L1 L1 L1 L1 MRA-L MRA-F #3 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #0
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU]
RRH-B4 #0 or #1 or #2 Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #0~#2]
Figure 3.26 CPRI Cable Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-39 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 1) Install the CPRI cable (RRH-B4 interface) from the U-RAS Flexible V2 DU to the optic port on RRH-B4. 2) Connect RRH-B4 side connector of CPRI cable to the optic port.
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #0]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) CPRI Cable A
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #1]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) CPRI Cable A
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #2]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) CPRI Cable A Figure 3.27 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1 (1) 3-40 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual CPRI Cable Connector (LC/PC) Detail A Optic0 (LTE0) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Figure 3.28 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1 (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-41 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 Case #2: WiMAX 4 Subcells+TD-LTE 1 Carrier/3 Sector, 2Tx/2Rx Follow the steps below to connect CPRI cables for WiMAX 4 subcells + TD-LTE 1 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx configuration of U-RAS Flexible V2. When U-RAS Flexible V2 supports WiMAX/TD-LTE multi-mode, up to 4 WiMAX channel cards (MRA-F) can be mounted on the U-RAS Flexible V2 to support 4 subcells. The operator can set operating sectors and frequencies for each subcell. The following example shows the pin map where an alpha sector has 3 and a beta sector has 1 respectively among 6 WiMAX subcells. Table 3.8 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2) DU Port Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) Slate[Gray] (LC4)
-
White (LC5)
-
Red (LC6)
-
RRH-B4 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #0 Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #1
-
Blue (LC0)
-
NC NC RRH-B4 #0 Blue (LC0) RRH-B4 #1
-
NC NC Blue (LC0) RRH-B4 #2
-
NC NC MRA-F #0 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #3 MRA-L L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 A0 A1 A2 A3 B0 B1 B2 B3 C0 C1 C2 C3 3-42 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual A0 A1 A2 A3 B0 B1 B2 B3 L0 L0 L0 L0 L1 L1 L1 L1 MRA-L MRA-F #3 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #0
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU]
P C1 C2 C3 o w e r C a b l e B r a c k e t Optic7(WiMAX3) Optic6(WiMAX2) Optic5(WiMAX1) Optic4(WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) C0
[RRH-B4 #0]
[RRH-B4 #1]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #2]
Figure 3.29 CPRI Cable Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-43 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 1) Install the CPRI cable (RRH-B4 interface) from the U-RAS Flexible V2 DU to the optic port on RRH-B4. 2) Connect RRH-B4 side connector of CPRI cable to the optic port.
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #0]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2(LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) A
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #1]
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) B Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) C Figure 3.30 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2 (1) 3-44 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Detail A Detail B Detail C CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Optic0 (LTE0) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Figure 3.31 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2 (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-45 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 Case #3: 2Tx/4Rx or 4Tx/4Rx Follow the steps below to connect CPRI cables for 2Tx/4Rx or 4Tx/4Rx configuration of the U-RAS Flexible V2. Table 3.9 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3) DU Port Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) RRH-B4 MRA-F #0 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #3 MRA-L L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 A0 A1 A2 A3 B0 B1 B2 B3 C0 C1 C2 C3 Slate[Gray] (LC4) Red (LC6) Slate[Gray] (LC4) Red (LC6) Slate[Gray] (LC4) Red (LC6) White (LC5) Black (LC7) Blue (LC0) Green (LC1) NC NC Blue (LC0) Green (LC1) NC NC Blue (LC0) Green (LC1) NC NC RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 RRH-B4 #0 or #1 or #2 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 3-46 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual A0 A1 A2 A3 B0 B1 B2 B3 C0 C1 C2 C3 L0 L0 L0 L0 L1 L1 L1 L1 MRA-L MRA-F #3 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #0
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU]
RRH-B4 #0 or #1 or #2 RRH-B4 #0 or #1 or #2 Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #0~#2]
Figure 3.32 CPRI Cable Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-47 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 1) Install the CPRI cable (RRH-B4 interface) from the U-RAS Flexible V2 DU to the optic port on RRH-B4. 2) Connect RRH-B4 side connector of CPRI cable to the optic port.
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #0]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic 5(WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) A
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #1]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) A
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #2]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) A Figure 3.33 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3 (1) 3-48 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Detail A Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic2 (LTE2) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Figure 3.34 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3 (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-49 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 3.5.1.2 For Smart MBS: TD-LTE Consider the following cases when connecting the CPRI cable (RRH-4 interface) for TD-
LTE. Case #1: TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx Follow the steps below to connect CPRI cables for TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx configuration of the Smart MBS. Table 3.10 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #1) UADU Port L9CA #0 L9CA #0 Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 Blue (LC0)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
Orange (LC1)
-
Orange (LC1)
-
Orange (LC1)
-
RRH-B4 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 3-50 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5
[UADU]
L9CA #1 L9CA #0 Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #0~#2]
Figure 3.35 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-51 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 1) Install the CPRI cable (RRH-B4 interface) from the Smart MBS UADU to the optic port on RRH-B4. 2) Connect RRH-B4 side connector of CPRI cable to the optic port.
[RRH-B4 #0]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) l e b a C I A R P C
[UADU]
[RRH-B4 #1]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) l e b a C I A R P C
[UADU]
Figure 3.36 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #1 (1) 3-52 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual
[RRH-B4 #2]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) l e b a C I R P C A
[UADU]
Detail A Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Figure 3.37 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #1 (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-53 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 Case #2: TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/4Rx or 4Tx/4Rx Follow the steps below to connect CPRI cables for TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/4Rx or 4Tx/4Rx configuration of the Smart MBS. Table 3.11 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #2) RRH-B4 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 L9CA #1 L9CA #0 UADU Port Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) L9CA #0 L9CA #1 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 Blue (LC0) Green (LC2) Blue (LC0) Green (LC2) Blue (LC0) Green (LC2) Orange (LC1) Brown (LC3) Orange (LC1) Brown (LC3) Orange (LC1) Brown (LC3) L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5
[UADU]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #0~2]
Figure 3.38 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #2) 3-54 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 1) Install the CPRI cable (RRH-B4 interface) from the Smart MBS UADU to the optic port on RRH-B4. 2) Connect RRH-B4 side connector of CPRI cable to the optic port.
[RRH-B4 #0]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) A
[UADU]
[RRH-B4 #1]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) l e b a C I R P C l e b a C I A R P C
[UADU]
Figure 3.39 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #2 (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-55 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0
[RRH-B4 #2]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) l e b a C I A R P C
[UADU]
Detail A CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic1 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Figure 3.40 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #2 (2) 3-56 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 3.5.1.3 For Stacking between U-RAS Flexible V2 (WiMAX) and Smart MBS Following shows how to connect CPRI cables for stacking between U-RAS Flexible V2
(WiMAX) and Smart MBS (TD-LTE). Case#1: WiMAX 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx+TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx Follow the steps below to connect CPRI cables for WiMAX 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx +
TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx configuration of U-RAS Flexible V2 and Smart MBS. Table 3.12 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Stacking, Case #1) DU (UADU) DU (UADU) Port U-RAS Flexible V2 MRA-F #0 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #3 MRA-F #4 MRA-F #5 Smart MBS L9CA #0 L9CA #1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) RRH-B4 Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #0
-
Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #1
-
Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #2
-
White (LC5) RRH-B4 #0
-
White (LC5) RRH-B4 #1
-
White (LC5)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
RRH-B4 #2 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 Orange (LC1) RRH-B4 #0
-
Orange (LC1) RRH-B4 #1
-
Orange (LC1) RRH-B4 #2
-
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-57 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5
[UADU]
L9CA #1 L9CA #0 Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #0~#2]
L0 L0 L0 L0 L0 L0 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 MRA-F #5 MRA-F #4 MRA-F #3 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #0
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU]
Figure 3.41 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Stacking, Case #1) 3-58 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 1) Install CPRI cables (RRH-B4 interface) between:
- RRH-B4 and L0, L2, and L4 ports on UADU L9CA #0 and #1
- RRH-B4 and L0 ports on U-RAS Flexible V2 DU MRA-F #0-#5 2) Connect the UADU- and U-RAS Flexible V2 DU-side connectors to the following ports.
- L0, L2, and L4 ports on UADU L9CA #0 and #1
- L0 ports on U-RAS Flexible V2 DU MRA-F #0-#5 B
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
l e b a C I R P C l e b a C I R P C l e b a C I l e b a C I R P C R P C
[RRH-B4 #0]
[RRH-B4 #1]
[RRH-B4 #2]
CPRI Cable
[UADU Front]
l e b a C I R P C A Figure 3.42 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #1 (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-59 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 Detail A CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Figure 3.43 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #1 (2) 3-60 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Case #2: WiMAX 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/4Rx + TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/4Rx Follow the steps below to connect CPRI cables for WiMAX 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/4Rx +
TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/4Rx configuration of U-RAS Flexible V2 and Smart MBS. Table 3.13 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Stacking, Case #2) DU (UADU) DU (UADU) Port U-RAS Flexible V2 MRA-F #0 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #3 MRA-F #4 MRA-F #5 Smart MBS L9CA #0 L9CA #1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) RRH-B4 Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #0 Red (LC6) Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #1 Red (LC6) Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #2 Red (LC6) White (LC5) Black (LC7) White (LC5) Black (LC7) White (LC5) Black (LC7) Blue (LC0) Green (LC2) Blue (LC0) Green (LC2) Blue (LC0) Green (LC2) Orange (LC1) Brown (LC3) Orange (LC1) Brown (LC3) Orange (LC1) Brown (LC3) RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-61 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5
[UADU]
L9CA #1 L9CA #0 Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #0~#2]
L0 L0 L0 L0 L0 L0 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 MRA-F #5 MRA-F #4 MRA-F #3 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #0
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU]
Figure 3.44 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Stacking, Case #2) 3-62 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 1) Install CPRI cables (RRH-B4 interface) between:
- RRH-B4 and L0~L5 ports on UADU L9CA #0 and #1
- RRH-B4 and L0 and L1 ports on U-RAS Flexible V2 DU MRA-F #0-#5 2) Connect the UADU- and U-RAS Flexible V2 DU-side connectors to the following ports.
- L0~L5 ports on UADU L9CA #0 and #1
- L0 and L1 ports on U-RAS Flexible V2 DU MRA-F #0-#5
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
l e b a C I R P C
[RRH-B4 #0]
l e b a C I R P C
[UADU Front]
B A Figure 3.45 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #2 (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-63 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0
[RRH-B4 #1]
[RRH-B4 #2]
B
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
CPRI Cable A
[UADU Front]
CPRI Cable B
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
CPRI Cable A
[UADU Front]
CPRI Cable Figure 3.46 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #2 (2) 3-64 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Detail A CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Figure 3.47 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #2 (3) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-65 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 Case #3: WiMAX 6 Subcell 2Tx/2Rx + TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx U-RAS Flexible V2 DU interfaces with Smart MBS to support the WiMAX and TD-LTE services simultaneously. Up to 6 WiMAX channel cards (MRA-F) can be mounted on the U-RAS Flexible V2 to support 6 subcells. The operator can set operating sectors and frequencies for each subcell. The following example shows the pin map where an alpha sector has 4 and a beta sector has 2 respectively among 6 WiMAX subcells. Table 3.14 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Stacking, Case #3) DU (UADU) DU (UADU) Port U-RAS Flexible V2 MRA-F #0 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #3 MRA-F #4 MRA-F #5 Smart MBS L9CA #0 L9CA #1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) RRH-B4 Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #0
-
White (LC5)
-
Red (LC6)
-
Black (LC7)
-
RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #0 Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #1
-
White (LC5) RRH-B4 #1
-
Blue (LC0)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 Orange (LC1) RRH-B4 #0
-
Orange (LC1) RRH-B4 #1
-
Orange (LC1) RRH-B4 #2
-
3-66 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5
[UADU]
L9CA #1 L9CA #0 Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #0]
[RRH-B4 #1]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #2]
L0 L0 L0 L0 L0 L0 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 MRA-F #5 MRA-F #4 MRA-F #3 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #0
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU]
Figure 3.48 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Stacking, Case #3) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-67 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 1) Install CPRI cables (RRH-B4 interface) between:
- RRH-B4 and L0, L2, and L4 ports on UADU L9CA #0 and #1
- RRH-B4 and L0 port on U-RAS Flexible V2 DU MRA-F #0-#5 2) Connect the UADU- and U-RAS Flexible V2 DU-side connectors to the following ports.
- L0, L2, and L4 ports on UADU L9CA #0 and #1
- L0 ports on U-RAS Flexible V2 DU MRA-F #0-#5
[RRH-B4 #0]
B
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
CPRI Cable A
[UADU Front]
CPRI Cable B
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
CPRI Cable
[RRH-B4 #1]
A A
[UADU Front]
CPRI Cable
[RRH-B4 #2]
[UADU Front]
[UADU Front]
CPRI Cable Figure 3.49 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #3 (1) 3-68 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Detail A Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Detail B Detail C CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Figure 3.50 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case# 3 (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-69 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 3.5.2 RET Cable Connection Follow the steps below to connect the Remote Electrical Tilting (RET) cable to control the antenna tilting angle remotely. Table 3.15 RET Cable Connection Classification Description Installation Section RF Antenna~RRH-B4 Cable Connector RET Cable Assy RS-485 1) Install a RET cable assy from the RF antenna to the RET port of RRH-B4
[RF Antenna]
RET Cable Assy 3-70 Figure 3.51 RET Cable Connection (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 2) Connect the RET cable connector to the RET port at the bottom of the RRH-B4 RET Connector (SAMWOO, SU-20SP-8P) RET Cable (Shield Cable) Heat Shrink Tube (Jelly Type) Heat Shrink Tube (Jelly Type) Heat Shrink Tube (Jelly Type) Figure 3.52 RET Cable Connection (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-71 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 Figure 3.53 RET Cable Connector Table 3.16 RET Cable Connector Pin Map RET Connector Samwoo, SU-20SP-8P Pin Function 3 4 5 6 7 RS485B DGND RS485A
+21 V
+21 V RTN 1, 2, 8 NC RET
- W hen 21 VDC volts are applied, the current supplied to the RET from RRH-B4 must be 1 A or lower.
- The exterior of the RET connector must be made of metal without vent hole or other UL certified material. 3-72 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 3.5.3 RF Cable Connection Follow the steps below to connect the RF cable. Table 3.17 RF Cable Connection Classification Description Installation Section RRH-B4~RF Antenna Cable RRH-B4~RF Antenna 1/2 in. Feeder Line Connector RRH-B4 Mini Din Type-Male RF Antenna Din Type-Male Recommended Mini Din Type-Male 1.45 lbf.ft (20 kgf.cm) Torque Value Din Type-Male 14.50 lbf.ft (200 kgf.cm) Working Tools Cable Cutter, Wire Stripper, Nipper, Torque Wrench, Spanner, Knife, Soldering Iron, Lead Installing the Antenna When you install the antenna, the antenna must be within the protective angle
(left/right side 45 each from the central axis) to prevent the antenna from lightning damage. Lightning Rod 45 45 RF Antenna SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-73 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 RF Cable Configuration The RF cable is connected in the following two methods. Prepare and install parts based on the method agreed by a service provider or the site conditions. Table 3.18 RF Cable Connection at Antenna Connection Area Case Case #1 Case #2 l e b a c t h g a r t i S i s u d a r
. i n M l e b a c t i h g a r t S i s u d a r
. i n M Description RF Antenna the RF antenna. Connect a 7/8 in. or longer feeder line directly to n o i t c e s R
- If a space for min. radius of curvature can be secured when a 7/8 in. or longer feeder line is used.
- If no excessive force is applied to the connector assembled to the antenna port or cable because the straight cable section is long enough. t e r u a v r u c f o RF Antenna the RF antenna. Connect a 1/2 in. feeder line (jumper cable) to n o i t c e s R
- If a space for min. radius of curvature cannot be secured when a 7/8 in. or longer feeder line is used.
- If excessive force is applied to the connector assembled to the antenna port or cable and it may cause poor contact or damage because the straight cable section is not long enough. t e r u a v r u c f o 7/8 in. or longer feeder line: 7/8 in./1 1/4 in./1 5/8 in. feeder line, etc. The RF cable must be connected based on the method agreed by a provider or the site conditions. 3-74 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual RF Antenna
[RRH-B4]
1/2 in. Feeder Line
(RRH-B4~RF Antenna) Figure 3.54 RF Cable Configuration RF Antenna Connector As different connector types may be used depending on the RF antenna type, check the antenna connector before connecting the cable. RF Cable Identification Tag Installation Attach the identification tape in the below table to the RF cable. Table 3.19 RF Cable Identification Tag Category Description Installation position Attach the identification tag to the both ends of the antenna. Materials Use the material of aluminum coated by vinyl for the identification tag. Fixing method
- Antenna side: Attach the tag to the feeder line using binding strings through the two holes on the tag.
- Equipment Side: Cover up the feeder line with the tag and fix it using binding strings through the two holes on the tag. Identification method The markings must be prevented from being erased by using relief engraving or coated labels. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-75 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 RF Cable Connection Follow the steps below to connect the cable between RRH-B4 and RF antenna. 1) Before connecting the connector to the RF port (Mini Din type-female) at the bottom of RRH-B4, insert a heat shrink tube (jelly type). 2) After connecting the connector, place the heat shrink tube inserted in the previous step at the connecting area and shrink it using a heating gun. Mini Din Type-Female Connector Mini Din Type-Male Connector 1/2 in. Feeder Line
(RRH-B4 RF Port~RF Antenna) Heat Shrink Tube (Jelly Type) 3-76 Figure 3.55 RF Cable Connection (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 3) Insert a heat shrink tube (jelly type) for finishing at the end of the antenna jumper cable (1/2 in. feeder line) with a Din type-male connector installed and then connect to the antenna input port. 4) When the connector is connected completely, insert the heat shrink tube inserted in the previous step up to the connecting area and shrink it using a heating gun. RF Antenna Antenna Connector (Din Type-Female) Din Type-Male Connector for 1/2 in. Feeder Line Heat Shrink Tube (Jelly Type) 1/2 in. Feeder Line Figure 3.56 RF Cable Connection (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-77 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Ver. 4.0 Checking RF Cable Connection After connecting the RF cables, perform the continuity test and feeder cable return loss to check if the RF cable is changed and measure VSWR of antenna and RF cable. Connection Part of System External Interface Connector Antenna Measure all cables of section ~ . The measured VSWR should be the specification value or less. If the VSWR exceeds the specification value, disassemble the connector and measure each section separately. Checking VSWR for Minimum Cable Bend Radius and Length of RF Cable If the VSW R value for minimum cable bend radius and length of RF cable is not applied, system may not work properly because RF signals cannot transmit or receive smoothly. So, the VSWR value for minimum cable bend radius and length of RF cable must be checked and applied. Cautions When Measuring VSWR When measuring VSWR, if you open the antenna port when the transmission output is not completely off, a spike signal may flow into the reception path, which may cause damage to LNA. Make sure the transmission output is completely off when measuring VSWR. Checking the Specifications of Antenna/Arrestor Connector Depending on the supplier or manufacturer of antenna/arrestor the connector type may be different. Also, the detail specifications of a connector may be different depending on cable type even for the sam e connector type. Therefore, check the detail specifications of a connector before preparing parts. Ex) Din Type-Male: for 1/2 in. Feeder line, for 7/8 in. Feeder Line 3-78 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual CHAPTER 4. Checking Installation Status 4.1 Installation Checking Procedure Below is the procedure to check installation status. Inspection Plan On-site Inspection Inspection Checklist Sharing Inspection Results Inspection Checklist/Corrective Actions Taking Corrective Actions Checking the Results of Corrective Actions OK Nok Sharing the Results of Corrective Actions and Preparing Preventive Plan Figure 4.1 Installation Checking Procedure SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 4-1 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 4. Checking Installation Status Ver. 4.0 Inspection Plan Create an inspection sheet per system and select an inspector to set an inspection schedule per site. On-site Inspection and Inspection Checklist The on-site inspection is to perform inspection visually or using instruments for each specification, standard, and installation status, etc. based on the inspection checklist actually at a site where the system ins installed. The inspector must record the results onto the inspection checklist during or after filed inspection. Sharing Inspection Results and Taking Corrective Actions The inspector must share the inspection results (inspection checklist/corrective actions) with a installation operator and the installation operator must take the corrective actions if necessary after reviewing the requirements. Checking the Results of Corrective Actions The inspector must check if the corrective actions are properly taken. If they are not sufficient, the inspector must ask the installation operator to take the corrective actions again. Sharing the Results of Corrective Actions and Preparing Preventive Plan After the corrective actions are all completed, the inspector must share the results with the installation operator and relevant departments and prepare a preventive plan to prevent the same or similar problems from re-occurring. Table 4.1 Construction Situation Checklist Category Check Items Criteria Installing Appearance of equipment and Equipment damage such as Dent, Equipment mechanical parts scratch and crack, etc. Placement of equipment and Maintenance and horizontal/vertical mechanical parts placement Leveling condition of equipment Horizontal/vertical fixing and mechanical parts
(level, weight, rubber hose, etc.) Validity of status and Visual inspection and magnet check specifications of tightening Compliance with tightening torque bolt/nut/washer, etc. value Board/blank panel installation Checking assembly status status Insulation status Checking electrical contact between insulators (insulation resistance tester) Other works (cable duct Checking position and installation installation status, etc.) status Result Pass Fail 4-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Table 4.1 Construction Situation Checklist (Continued) Category Check Items Criteria Result Pass Fail Grounding Status of ground bar Checking the separation of installation per usage communication/power/lightning grounding Cable Size Checking specifications such as thickness, etc. Cabling and binding status Cable damage/properness installation route Checking binding interval and the condition of used materials Cable connection Assembly and tightening condition of a pressure terminal Checking compliance with tightening torque value Installation status of cable Checking position, marking, and tag tag installation type Power Installation status of power Power supply capacity/input voltage supply and circuit breaker
(tester) Checking circuit breaker type and capacity Cable Size Checking thickness and length limitation Cabling and binding status Cable damage/properness installation route Checking binding interval and the condition of used materials Cable connection Cable damage/properness installation route Checking binding interval and the condition of used materials Installation status of cable Checking position, marking, and tag tag installation type Other data Cable size Checking cable specifications per cables usage Cabling and binding status Checking cable damage/properness installation route, binding distance and condition of used materials Cable connection Checking cable connection (Pin Map), assembly and tightening status of a connector and compliance with tightening torque value Installation status of cable Checking position, marking, and tag tag installation type SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 4-3 2600-00F1W8GAA CHAPTER 4. Checking Installation Status Ver. 4.0 Table 4.1 Construction Situation Checklist (Continued) Category Check Items Criteria RF Antenna installation status Checking specifications, installation position, fixing status, and gap between antennas Installation status of Checking specifications, installation arrestor/line position, and fixing status amplifier/splitter, etc. Cabling and binding status Checking cable damage/properness of installation route/binding distance and the condition of used materials Cable connection Checking cable connection status, connector assembly and tightening status, compliance with tightening torque value, and finishing Installation of cable tag Checking position, marking, and tag installation type Others Reserved ports and cable Finishing (dust cap, etc.) inlet status Connection of equipment Checking tightening status I/O port (Conduit/Cable Gland) Installation of cable Installation of cable tray and duct, etc. installation route Status of inside/outside of Checking the stocking condition of the equipment and system waste parts, waste materials, packing surrounding area materials, etc. Opinion Result Pass Fail 4-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ANNEX A. Sector Antenna Installation A.1 Cautions when Installing a Sector Antenna Precautions of antenna installation are as follows. Sector antennas should be installed vertically. (1) Antenna is the precise material, so be careful not to make damage or form change. When moving antenna, use the tool suitable to rating. In addition, use the rated carrying device which is at least 200 % or more than antenna considering the stability. If it rains, suspend connecting the feeder cable and antenna. Be careful not to give too much strength to the antenna. Fix it after adjusting the direction of antenna exactly. Distance between steel tower and antenna and the distance between send-receive antennas are based on the antenna layout. Attach the antenna on the position specified in the drawing. Install the antenna not to make a feature change of the antenna considering the direction of the radiation. Connect the antenna not making the alien substance flowed so that Passive Inter-
Modulation Distortion (PMID) is not affected. Measure VSWR of all antennas and the value should be within the regulated value. A.2 Sector Antenna Layout The method of sector antenna layout is as follows. 1) Use the transit to adjust the antenna installation direction exactly. 2) Fix the direction of the sector antenna, same as the angle settled when designing the cell after installing the steel tower. 3) Arrange the antennas of each sector to the sector directional angle at right angles by adjusting the distance between antenna and steel tower. In the event of the station whose the direction between sectors is not 120, install it to make the steel tower and antenna direction different being careful of the tilt and azimuth. 4) For circular platform, separate the antenna interval at maximum. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. A-1 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX A. Sector Antenna Installation Ver. 4.0 A.3 Sector Antenna Installation The method of sector antenna installation is as follows. 1) Put up an antenna pole and insert the sector antenna into the antenna pole using a fixing clamp. 2) Set the antennas up/down tilt to 0 and fix the fixing clamps at the top and bottom. 3) Adjust the tilted angle of the antenna by taking the signal strength into account. The bolts on the upper and lower guide clamps must be loose as to allow angle adjustment of the antenna. 4) After adjusting the antenna angle, tighten up the 4 loose bolts on the upper and lower guide clamps. A-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Guide Clamp Bolt_3 Guide Clamp Bolt_1 Upper Fixing Clamp Upper Guide Clamp Pole Lower Guide Clamp Lower Fixing Clamp Guide Clamp Bolt_2 Main Radiation Direction Antenna Input Port Guide Clamp Bolt_4 Figure A.1 Sector Antenna SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. A-3 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX A. Sector Antenna Installation Ver. 4.0 Installing the Antenna When you install the antenna, the antenna must be within the protective angle
(left/right side 45 each from the central axis) to prevent the antenna from lightning damage. Lightning Rod 45 45 Sector Antenna A-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ANNEX B. Installing Feeder Cable B.1 Cautions When Installing Feeder Cable When installing the feeder cable (GPS/RF cable), the following cautions shall be considered:
Put a plate to work not to make damage for the surface of the feeder cable. If there is external damage of the feeder cable, cut the damaged part and work wiring. After connecting the antenna to the feeder cable, finish the connection part of the contracted pipe using the contracted tube. Attach the cognitive tapes to the both ends of the feeder cable, which makes it easy to recognize. When connecting cabinet, antenna and lightening arrestor, etc. to the feeder cable, connect strongly to prevent from generating reflected wave. The curvature radius should be maximized, keep the minimum curvature radius. Table B.1 Curvature Radius of Feeder Cable for Outdoor Specification Allowed Radius of Curvature LS Feeder Line HFC-12D HFC-22D 1/2 in. 7/8 in. 4.02 in. (125 mm) 9.84 in. (250 mm) Remark Outdoor HFC-33D 1-1/4 in. 14.96 in. (380 mm) HFC-42D 1-5/8 in. 20.08 in. (510 mm) RFS Feeder Line LCF12-50 1/2 in. 4.92 in. (125 mm) LCF78-50 7/8 in. 9.84 in. (250 mm) LCFS114-50 1-1/4 in. 14.96 in. (380 mm) LCF158-50 1-5/8 in. 19.69 in. (500 mm) 1/2 in. 7/8 in. 1-1/4 in. 1-5/8 in. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. B-1 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX B. Installing Feeder Cable Ver. 4.0 Table B.2 Curvature Radius of Feeder Cable for Indoor (Based on LS Feeder Line) Specification Allowed Radius of Curvature Remark LS Feeder Line HFSC 6D 1/4 in. 0.98 in. (25 mm) Indoor HFSC 10D 3/8 in. 0.98 in. (25 mm) HFSC 12D 1/2 in. 1.26 in. (32 mm) HFSC 22D 7/8 in. 4.92 in. (125 mm) RFS Feeder Line SCF14-50 1/4 in. 0.98 in. (25 mm) SCF38-50 3/8 in. 0.98 in. (25 mm) SCF12-50 1/2 in. 1.26 in. (32 mm) UCF78-50 7/8 in. 4.92 in. (125 mm) 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 7/8 in. Table B.3 Curvature Radius of LMR-400 (Based on Times Microwave System) Specification LMR-400 Allowed Radius of Curvature Remark 1 in. (25.4 mm) Installation 4 in. (101.6 mm) Repeated Radius of Curvature of Feeder Line When installing a feeder line, the radius of curvature of the sections where cables bent should be larger than the allowed radius of curvature. If the radius of curvature for the feeder line installation is less than the allowed radius of curvature, it may affect the performance of the system. B-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Ensure that the feeder cable does not interfere with steel towers, ladders and in the areas chiefly used by people. Connect the connector to the antenna in a straight line and after connecting, do not apply excessive force. Use the vinyl tape for electricity and heat shrink tube for the external exposed part of the connector not to avoid leak water. Wind the self-bonding rubber tape overlapping (keep a distance as the half size of rubber tape) to the connector connection part and wind the vinyl tape for electricity to the 2 times or more and then cover with the jelly type heat shrink tube. Connection of Feeder Cable Connector Connecting the feeder cable connector is critical process, so the qualified workers who finished the related education should perform. Table B.4 Connector Connection Torque Value Connector SMA connector TNC connector N-type connector Din-type connector Torque Value 0.18 lbfft (2.5 kgfcm) 0.65 lbfft (9 kgfcm) 1.45 lbfft (20 kgfcm) 14.46 lbfft (200 kgfcm) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. B-3 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX B. Installing Feeder Cable Ver. 4.0 B.2 7/8 in. Feeder Line Ground Ground Kit Ground the 7/8 in. feeder line using the grounding kit located under the Tower Ground Bar
(TGB) installed in the lower section of the tower or in the cable duct. The procedure for connecting the ground kit to the 7/8 in. feeder line is as follows:
Insulation Tape Rubber Tape Ground Kit M6 25L Hex. Bolt M6 Spring Washer M6 Plane Washer M6 Plane Washer M6 Spring Washer M6 Hex. Nut 1) Remove about 2.17 in. (55 mm) of the sheath of cable when the 7/8 in. feeder line is used. 2) Open it by returning hook of the clamp fixing for Ground kit in the left direction. 1 2
. n i 7 1 2
.
) m m 5 5
(
Figure B.1 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (1) B-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 3) Insert the ground kit clamp into the place from which the 7/8 in. feeder line sheath is removed. 4) Pull the clamp lock to the upward so that the lock can be hung on the global protrusion area on the side. 5) Overlap the exposed part of the ground kit clamp using rubber tape (Keep a distance as the half size of rubber tape) and press it with yo ur hands lightly to make rubber tape adhere well. 6) Wrap the part where the rubber tape is attached using insulation tape two times or more. When cutting off the tape, cut it off neatly using a cutting device such as scissors or a knife. 3 4 7/8 in. Feeder Line Ground Kit Clamp Protrusion area Clamp lock 5 Rubber Tape 6 Insulation Tape Scissors (knife) Figure B.2 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. B-5 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX B. Installing Feeder Cable Ver. 4.0 7) Align the heat shrink tube inserted when installing the 7/8 in. feeder line into the fixing part of the ground kit.
- Heat shrink tube: jelly type, 1.65 in., 7.87 in. ( 42 mm, 200 mm) 8) Shrink the heat shrink tube by heating gun. Heat Shrink Tube 7 7.87 in.
(200 mm) Heating Gun Heat Shrink Tube 8 Figure B.3 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (3) B-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 9) After the ground kit has been installed to the 7/8 in. feeder line, attach the pressure terminal (1 hole) of the ground cable connected to the ground kit to the TGB. 10) When attaching the pressure terminal, use M6 25L hex. Bolts. 7/8 in. Feeder Line M6 25L Hex. Bolt (STS304) Ground kit Pressure Terminal
(1 Hole) TGB Ground Cable (F-GV 35 mm2 1C) TGB (Tower Ground Bar) Figure B.4 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (4) Checking the Ground Kit and TGB Specifications The specifications, clamp, and pressure terminal type of the ground kit and TGB differ depending on manufacturers. Make sure to check the specifications of the ground kit and TGB, and identify the installation method before installing it. Table B.5 TGB Installation Example Category Description TGB Usage Earth terminal board for RF cable for grounding in using the feeder line of more than 7/8 in. TGB Location Lower section of cable rack in feeder cable duck
- Less than 65.62 ft (20 m): 1 (Ex. steel tower lower section)
- Exceed 65.62 ft (20 m): 2 or more (Ex. steel tower lower and upper section) Material Pure copper Installation Method Connection Method Extract the GV 35 mm2 ground cable to the direction of the floor and weld it Using the insulator to separate from the steel tower electrically to the towers ground cable. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. B-7 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX B. Installing Feeder Cable Ver. 4.0 B.3 Tower Ground Construction 1) Install a Tower Ground Bar (TGB) that will be used to ground a RF cable onto the tower. If the height of the tower is exceeds 65.62 ft (20 m), two or more TGBs should be installed (onto the lower and upper sections of the tower). If the tower is 65.62 ft (20 m) or less, one TGB should be installed. Since the TGB installation location and the number of TGBs to be installed can differ depending on the system environment and providers standards, consult your service provider. 2) Each TGB should be grounded and separated from other grounds. If there is an existing ground bar or ground cable for TGB, install the TGB by branching from it using a ground cable (GV35 mm2 1C) ground cable. (However, the specification of TGB ground cable can be different, defending on the standard of service provider.) 3) Tighten the Ground Kit (RF cable grounding assembly) to the TGB ground terminal and the tower hole using the pressure terminal hole attached at the end of the ground kits ground cable. Lightning Rod Lightning Rod Ground Cable
(GV 95 mm2 1C) Ground Kit TGB (Tower Ground Bar)
[Tower Height>65.62 ft (20 m)]
TGB Ground Cable
(F-GV 35 mm2 1C)
(7/8 in. Feeder Line or more) RF cable Ground Kit TGB (Tower Ground Bar) TGB Ground Cable
(F-GV 35 mm2 1C) Figure B.5 Connecting the Tower Ground Cable TGB Ground Cable
(F-GV 95 mm2 1C) B-8 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ANNEX C. Connector Assembly C.1 RJ-45 (Shield Type) Procedure that assembles the RJ-45 (shield type) connector is as follows:
1 2 3 1), 2) Prepare work tools and materials. 3) Pass the cable through the marking tube. 4 5 6 4) Pass the cable through the 5) Remove the coating 0.67 in. 6) Push the shield backward, RJ-45 cap.
(17 mm) from the end. and cut the aluminum shield. 7 8 9 7) Cut the shield leaving a 0.2 in. 8) Arrange the cable in reference 9) Cut the cable to make it
(5 mm) of it. to the pin map. 0.47 in.(12 mm) long. Figure C.1 Assembling the RJ-45 Connector (Shield Type) (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-1 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX C. Connector Assembly Ver. 4.0 10 11 12 10) Insert the RJ-45 modular jack. 11) Make sure that the shield does 12) Insert the cable completely into not get in the RJ-45 modular jack. the RJ-45 modular jack. 13 14 13) Compress the jack using the tool. 14) Compress the marking tube to finish the assembly. Figure C.2 Assembling the RJ-45 Connector (Shield Type) (2) C-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual C.2 RJ-45 (Normal Type) Procedure that assembles the RJ-45 (normal type) connector is as follows:
1 2 3 1) Prepare work tools and 2) Insert the RJ-45 cap to the 3) Remove the coating 0.67 in. materials. cable.
(17 mm) from the end. 4 5 6 4) Arrange the cable in reference 5) Cut the cable to make it 6) Insert the cable completely to the pin map. 0.47 in. (12 mm) long. into the RJ-45 modular jack. 7 8 7) Compress the jack using the 8) Push the RJ-45 cap to the tool. connector. Figure C.3 Assembling the RJ-45 Connector (Normal Type) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-3 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX C. Connector Assembly Ver. 4.0 C.3 N type-male (LMR-400) Below is the procedure for assembling the N type-male cable connector to LMR-400 cable. 1) The components of the N type-male include N type-male body, clamp ring, and heat shrink tube. Clamp Ring Heat Shrink Tube N type-Male Body Clamp Ring Heat Shrink Tube 2) Insert a heat shrink tube and clamp ring to the cable, and insert the cable into the End1 of the prep/strip tool. Then remove the shield and sheath except for the center conductor at the end of cable by rotating the tool clockwise. Prep/strip Tool End1 Center Conductor LMR-400 3) Insert the cable into the End2 of the prep/strip tool again, and remove the sheath except for the shield by rotating the tool. Shield LMR-400 Prep/strip Tool End2 4) Trim the end of the center conductor by using a deburring tool. Deburring tool Figure C.4 N type-male Connector Assembling (1) C-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 5) Push a connector into the end of the cable. Then, push it further until the center conductor is firmly inserted into the pin connection part of the N-Type male body. Make the shield overlap the N-Type male body, pull out the clamp ring, and let it go to its original position so that the remaining length may be folded. 6) Cut off the folded length of the shield using a cutting device so that it does not protrude outside when the clamp ring is inserted. After arranging the shield, push up the clamp ring toward the connector until the entire shield is covered. 7) Using a compressor and hexagonal dies, pressurize the clamp ring to fix the cable and connector. 8) Lift the heat shrink tube up to the connection point on the connector and shrink the heat shrink tube using a heating gun. Figure C.5 N type-male Connector Assembling (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-5 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX C. Connector Assembly Ver. 4.0 C.4 TNC-male (LMR-400) Below is the procedure for assembling the TNC-male cable connector to LMR-400 cable. 1) The components of the TNC-male include TNC-
male body, clamp ring, and heat shrink tube. Clamp Ring Heat Shrink Tube TNC-Male Body Clamp Ring Heat Shrink Tube 2) Insert a heat shrink tube and clamp ring to the cable, and insert the cable into the End1 of the prep/strip tool. Then remove the shield and sheath except for the center conductor at the end of cable by rotating the tool clockwise. Prep/strip tool End1 Center Conductor LMR-400 3) Insert the cable into the End2 of the prep/strip tool again, and remove the sheath by rotating the tool. Prep/strip tool End2 Shield LMR-400 4) Trim the end of the center conductor by using a deburring tool. Deburring tool Figure C.6 TNC-male Connector Assembling (1) C-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 5) Push a connector into the end of the cable. Then, push it further until the center conductor is firmly inserted into the pin connection part of the N-Type male body. Make the shield overlap the N-Type male body, pull out the clamp ring, and let it go to its original position so that the remaining len1/2 in. be folded. 6) Cut off the folded length of the shield using a cutting device so that it does not protrude outside when the clamp ring is inserted. After arranging the shield, push up the clamp ring toward the connector until the entire shield is covered. 7) Using a compressor and hexagonal dies, pressurize the clamp ring to fix the cable and connector. 8) Lift the heat shrink tube up to the connection point on the connector and shrink the heat shrink tube using a heating gun. Figure C.7 TNC-male Connector Assembling (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-7 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX C. Connector Assembly Ver. 4.0 C.5 N type-male (1/2 in. feeder line) Below is the method for assembling the N type-male connector to the 1/2 in. feeder line. 1) The components of the N type-male are an N type-male body, an insert ring, a clamping nut, O-ring, and a heat shrink tube, and it is assembled using the wire stripper, trimming tool, spanner, etc. O-Ring Clamping Nut Insert Ring Heat Shrink Tube
[1.1 in. (28 mm)]
N type-Male Body 1/2 in. Feeder Line Trimming Tool 2) Using a stripping tool or a knife, strip the 1/2 in. feeder line by 1 in. (25.4 mm) from the end, as shown in the figure below. 1/2 in. Feeder Line Conductor 1/2 in. Feeder Line Jacket 1 in. (25.4 mm) Figure C.8 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (1) C-8 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 3) Remove the 0.43 in. (11 mm) of the external conductor end and 0.39 in. (10 mm) of the jacket using a trimming tool. Trimming Tool Collet 4) Insert the internal conductor into the deburring hole at the bottom of the trimming tool to trim it. 0.94 in. 0.43 in.
(24 mm)
(11 mm) Figure C.9 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-9 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX C. Connector Assembly Ver. 4.0 5) Insert the o-ring, clamping nut, insert ring and N type-male body to the stripped 1/2 in. feeder line in this order. O-ring is inserted into the second groove from inside of outer insulator. 6) Tighten the clamping nut and N type-male body inserted into the 1/2 in. feeder line firmly using a spanner. The recommended torque for tightening the clamping nut and N type-male body is 306~510 lbfft (30~
50 N.m). (Note that it should only be tightened by rotating the external body with the clamping nut in a fixed and stable position.) O-Ring Clamping Nut Insert Ring N type-Male Body Keep the fixed state Figure C.10 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (3) C-10 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 7) Insert the heat shrink tube into the 1/2 in. feeder line fitted with the N type-male connector as shown in the Figure below.
- Heat shrink tube: 1.1 in., 3.94 in. ( 28 mm, 100 mm) 8) Shrink the heat shrink tube inserted into the 1/2 in. feeder line using a heating gun. Clamping Nut Heat Shrink Tube (1.1 in.) Heating Gun Figure C.11 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (4) Checking to carry out when assembling the N type-male connector The shape, tool and assembly method may differ depending on the connector type and manufacturer. Make sure to check the user manual provided by the manufacturer before assembling. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-11 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX C. Connector Assembly Ver. 4.0 C.6 Din type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Below is the method for assembling the Din type-male connector to the 1/2 in. feeder line. 1) The components of the Din type-male are an Din type-male body, pin, an insert ring, a clamping nut, o-ring, and a heat shrink tube, and it is assembled using the wire stripper, trimming tool, wrench, etc. Pin Clamping Nut Feeder Line Din Type-Male Body Insert Ring O-Ring Heat Shrink Tube 2) Straighten the cable, then, using a suitable tool, strip it to the connectors wire strip length. When cutting the sheath, hold the cable firmly with one hand and cut the cable pulling the cutting tool inwards with the other hand. Gently rotate the tool several times (do not pull it too hard), so that the internal copper line is not damaged. Cutting Tool 3) Using a cutter, cut the sheath from the stripped edge to the end of the cable and completely strip the sheath. Cutter Feeder Line 4) Insert the o-ring, clamping nut, insert ring, pin and Din type-male body into the stripped feeder line in this order. Figure C.12 Assembling the Din type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (1) C-12 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 5) Tighten firmly the clamping nut and Din type-male body inserted to the 1/2 in. feeder line using a wrench. The recommended torque for tightening the clamping nut and Din type-male body is 30~50 N.m.
(Note that it should only be tightened by rotating the external body with the clamping nut in a fixed and stable position.) Spanner (keep the fixed state) Clamping Nut Din Type-Male Body 6) Insert the heat shrink tube to the 1/2 in. feeder line fitted with the Din type-male connector; and shrink the heat shrink tube inserted into the feeder line using a heating gun.
- Heat shrink tube: 1.1 in., 3.94 in. ( 28 mm, 100 mm) Heating Gun Heat Shrink Tube Figure C.13 Assembling the Din type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (2) Checking to carry out when assembling the Din type-male connector The shape, tool and assembly method may differ depending on the connector type and manufacturer. Make sure to check the user manual provided by the manufacturer before assembling. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-13 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX C. Connector Assembly Ver. 4.0 C.7 Finishing the Connector Connection Part by Tape Finishing the connector connection part by tape (insulation tape, rubber tape, etc.) in the outdoor environment is as follows:
1) Overlap the exposed part of the connector connection part using rubber tape (Keep a distance as the half size of rubber tape) and press it with your hands lightly to make rubber tape adhere well. 2) Wrap the part where the rubber tape is attached using insulation tape two times or more. When cutting off the tape, cut it off neatly using a cutting device such as scissors or a knife. 3) Bind the end part of the insulation tape using cable tie to prevent slips. Rubber Tape Insulation Tape Cable Tie Figure C.14 Finishing the Connector Connection Part by Tape C-14 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual C.8 How to Shrink the Heat Shrink Tube C.8.1 When Assembling a Connector to the Feeder Line Below is the procedure for shrinking the heat shrink tube. 1/2 in. Feeder Line 1) Prepare a 1/2 in. feeder line, heat shrink tube, and heating gun to finish the cable using a heat shrink tube. 1/2 in. Connector Heat Shrink Tube (Jelly Type) 28/6 5.9 in. (150 mm) Heating Gun 2) Insert the heat shrink tube into the 1/2 in. feeder line, and then place the heat shrink tube at the end of the cutting area of the connector where the tool will be used. Cutting Area 3) Set the heating gun to 482 to 572F (250 to 300C). Figure C.15 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Feeder Line (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-15 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX C. Connector Assembly Ver. 4.0 Heat Shrink Tube 4) Holding one end of the heat shrink tube with your hand, apply heat starting from the connector using the heating gun. Heating Gun 5) Rotate the heating gun so that heat is evenly distributed to prevent that bubbles are generated or heat is concentrated to a specific part. 6) Shrink the heat shrink tube until jelly appears at the end part of it (refer the Figure below) and finish it. Jelly Figure C.16 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Feeder Line (2) C-16 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual C.8.2 When Connecting a Connector to another Connector Below is the procedure for shrinking the heat shrink tube. 1) Prepare a 1/2 in. feeder line, 7/8 in. feeder line, heat shrink tube, and heating gun to finish the cable using a heat shrink tube. Heat Shrink Tube (Jelly Type) 38/12 11.81 in. (300 mm) 7/8 in. Feeder Line 2) Inset the heat shrink tube to one end of the feeder line and connect the connector. Heating Gun Connector 1/2 in. Feeder Line 3) Insert the heat shrink tube, placing connector part
(where 1/2 in. and 7/8 in. feeder line will be connected) in the center, and mark the center part. Figure C.17 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Connection between Connectors (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-17 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX C. Connector Assembly Ver. 4.0 4) Set the heating gun to 482 to 572F (250 to 300C). 5) Holding one end of the heat shrink tube with your hand, apply heat starting from the marked part at the center using the heating gun. Heat Shrink Tube Heating Gun 6) Rotate the heating gun so that heat is evenly distributed to prevent that bubbles are generated or heat is concentrated to a specific part. Figure C.18 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Connection between Connectors (2) C-18 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 7) Shrink the heat shrink tube until jelly appears at the end part of it (refer the figure below) and finish it. Jelly Figure C.19 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Connection between Connectors (3) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-19 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX C. Connector Assembly Ver. 4.0 Check for Working with the Heat Shrink Tube
- If you work without holding one end of the heat shrink tube, the location of the heat shrink tube may be changed. Therefore, make sure to hold one end of it when applying heat.
- The connector part where 1/2 in. and 7/8 in. feeder line are connected must be the center of the heat shrink tube. After inserting the heat shrink tube, mark the center part.
- If jelly does not appear on the end of the heat shrink tube, it may m ean that it is not shrunk properly. Apply heat until jelly appears using a heating gun. Jelly C-20 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ANNEX D. Cleaning Optic Connector D.1 Cleaning Optic Connector When connecting optical cable to the system, performance of system can be decreased or fails can occur if core section of optical connector is dirty due to dust or foreign material. Therefore, worker should clean the optic connector before connecting optic cable to the system to prevent this phenomenon. This manual describes the method that cleans optic connector when using the IBCTM Brand cleaner. Caution When Connecting the Optical Cable Check whether there is dust or foreign material on the cutting section of the connector core before connecting the optic cable, and keep this away from dust or foreign material. If the cable is soiled with foreign material, do not blow to remove them. Make sure to clean the connector in accordance with the cleaning directions below. When using Optic Connector Cleaner When using optic connector cleaner, use the products shown in the example below or their equivalents. Ex) Manufacturer-USCONEC (http://www.usconec.com)
- IBCTM Brand Cleaner (P/N: 9393): For LC-LC and MU Connector Cleaning
- IBCTM Brand Cleaner (P/N: 9392): For SC Connector Cleaning
- IBCTM Brand Cleaner (P/N: 12910): For ODC Connector Cleaning Manufacturer-TheFibers (www.thefibers.com)
- HuxCleaner 1.25 mm Type: For LC and MU Connector Cleaning
- HuxCleaner 2.5 mm Type: For SC, FC and ST Connector Cleaning SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. D-1 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX D. Cleaning Optic Connector Ver. 4.0 D.2 IBCTM Brand Cleaner Method that uses IBCTM Brand Cleaner is as follows:
D.2.1 IBCTM Brand Type Cleaner (P/N 9393) Method that uses IBCTM Brand Cleaner for LC-LC and MU connector is as follows:
Guide Cap Nozzle Outer Shell Lock Button
(for Extend Nozzle)
[Optic Connector Cleaner Configuration]
Lock Button
(for Extend Nozzle)
[Nozzle Extension]
Guide Cap Guide Cap Guide Cap Cover
[In Case of LC type Connector (Plug)]
[In Case of LC type Connector (Jack)]
Figure D.1 Optic Connector Cleaner (IBCTM Brand Type Cleaner: P/N 9393) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. D-2 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Optic Module Cleaning (LC Type Jack) 1) To clean the optic module, remove the guide cap from the cleaner (P/N: 9393). Guide Cap Nozzle Outer Shell
[IBC Brand Cleaner: P/N 9393]
2) Insert a cleaner guide cap to every core of the optic module. Clean it by pushing the outer shell toward the nozzle until you hear the sound of the detergent being sprayed. (Repeat once or twice.) Optic Module Nozzle Outer Shell Figure D.2 Optic Module Cleaning (LC Type Jack) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. D-3 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX D. Cleaning Optic Connector Ver. 4.0 Optic Cable Connector Cleaning (LC Type Plug) 1) To clean the optic cable connector, open the guide cap cover from the cleaner (P/N: 9393). Guide Cap Nozzle Outer Shell Guide Cap Cover
[IBC Brand Cleaner: P/N 9393]
2) Insert a cleaner guide cap to every core of the optic cable connector. Clean it by pushing the outer shell toward the nozzle until you hear the sound of the detergent being sprayed. (Repeat once or twice.) Guide Cap Nozzle Outer Shell LC Type Connector D-4 Figure D.3 Optic Cable Connector Cleaning (LC Type Plug) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Measuring the Optical Output and Connecting the Optic Connector 1) Check the optical output again using an optic power meter. 2) If the optical output measurement result meets the reference value, clean the connector again and connect it. If the measurement result does not meet the reference value, discard the cable, replace it with a new cable, and then clean the new one and connect it to the system.
[LC/PC Plug]
Figure D.4 Measuring the Optical Output and Connecting the Optic Connector
[Optic Powermeter]
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. D-5 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX D. Cleaning Optic Connector Ver. 4.0 This page is intentionally left blank. D-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ANNEX E. Cable Gland Assembly Torque Wrench Caution When Assembling Cable Gland If the parts of a cable gland in the system are not correctly installed, outdoor air and moisture may flow into the system and cause corrosion, system fault, or serious fault to the cooling system. Therefore, assemble and finish the cable gland accurately. Caution When Installing Cable in the Cable Gland Only one cable of permitted specification (thickness) should be installed in the cable gland.
- The outdoor air or moisture may flow into the system if a cable that is thinner than the specification is used.
- If a cable is thicker than the specification or more than two cables are installed, the cable gland may be damaged. Caution When Loosening or Tightening Cable Gland Nut When assembling the cable gland or connecting it to a cable, make sure not to turn other parts (cable gland body) than a gland nut to loosen or tighten the gland. Turning the cable gland body may cause the influx of external air or moisture into the system, which may result in corrosion or system malfunction. Cable Gland Body Torque Wrench Cable Gland Nut SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. E-1 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX E. Cable Gland Assembly Ver. 4.0 Use Torque Wrench When Tightening Cable Gland Nut Tighten the cable gland nut using a torque wrench with standard torque. Torque Wrench E.1 Cable Gland Components The components of the cable gland are as follows. By loosening the gland nuts outside the unit, the cable gland is dissembled into 3 parts as shown in the picture below. (Except for system-side fixing parts) Protection Cover Cable Gland Nut Rain-proof Filler Figure E.1 Cable Gland Components E-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual E.2 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling When assembling a cable gland, follow the below steps to prevent any moisture or foreign substance from coming in. 1) Check the cable gland built on the unit to see whether it has the protection cover inside the cable gland nut as shown in the picture below (cross-section picture of outer wall of the unit), the same as the original factory configuration.
[Side picture]
Protection Cover Cable Gland Nut 2) Separate the cable gland nut by loosening counterclockwise. Here, check the protection cover
(circular transparent plate).
[When a cable gland nut is disassembled]
Protection Cover 3) Remove the protection cover and keep it carefully.
[When the protection cover is removed]
Cable Gland Nut Protection Cover Figure E.2 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. E-3 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX E. Cable Gland Assembly Ver. 4.0 4) Separate the waterproof filler from the cable gland body.
[When the rainproof filler is disassembled]
Rain-proof Filler 5) Install the cable by passing it through the cable gland nut from outside to inside. Cable Cable Gland Nut Inside Outside 6) After installing the cable through the cable gland body, connect it to the system according to assembling standard and clean up the rest of the cable. 7) Put the rainproof filler on the cable inside the cable gland nut. At this time, widen the waterproof filler and wrap the cable around. Grooves of Rain-proof Filler Inside Outside Rain-proof Filler Cable Cable Gland Nut Figure E.3 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling (2) E-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 8) Push the waterproof filler into the cable gland body. There are bumps inside of a cable gland body and outside of a rainproof filler, which allow easy coupling while preventing slippery rotation. Align the bumps and push the rainproof filler into the cable gland body. Bumps of Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Body Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Cable 9) Attach the waterproof filler into the cable gland body as sho wn in the picture below. Make sure it is pushed in completely. X O Cable Cable Gland Body Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut 10) Attach the cable gland nut and the cable gland body together and tighten the nut clockwise. Cable Cable Gland Body Cable Gland Nut Figure E.4 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling (3) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. E-5 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX E. Cable Gland Assembly Ver. 4.0 E.3 Unused Cable Gland Inspection and Assembly The unused cable gland should not be disassembled, and be kept in the original factory configuration. If the cable gland is disassembled, it should be assembled to the factory default by referring to the sequence of Cable Gland Parts Configuration. Outside of the System Inside of the System Cable Gland Cable Gland Body Rain-proof Washer Filler System Frame Protection Cable Gland Cover Nut Figure E.5 Unused Cable Gland Inspection and Assembly Checking Assembly State of the Unused Cable Gland All components of the unused cable gland must be secured in the original factory configuration. If the cable gland nut is fitted without the waterproof filler or the protection cover in place, reassemble them as illustrated in Unused Cable Gland Inspection and Assembly. E-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly F.1 Preparations The followings must be prepared to connect a pressure terminal to a cable.
[Cable]
[Pressure Terminal]
[Heat Shrink Tube]
[Cable Cutter]
[Wire Stripper]
[Handheld Compressor]
[Hydraulic Press]
[Marking Pen]
[Cutter Blade]
[Steel Ruler]
[Scissors]
[Heating Gun]
Figure F.1 Preparations SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. F-1 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly Ver. 4.0 F.2 Pressure Reference Table The pressure reference table used to assemble a pressure terminal to a cable is shown below. Table F.1 Pressure Reference Table for Pressure Terminal Category Hand Hand Hand Hand Hand Copper tube length of a pressure terminal mm In. 11 mm or less 0.43 in. 12~15 mm 16~23 mm 24~32 mm 0.47~0.59 in. 0.63~0.91 in. 0.94~1.26 in. 33 mm or more 1.3 in. or more Hydraulic 30 mm or less 1.18 in. or less Hydraulic 31~47 mm 1.22~1.85 in. Hydraulic 48~63 mm 1.89~2.48 in. Hydraulic 64 mm or more 2.52 in. or more Number of pressure points 1 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 Unit: in. (mm)
) 5
. 4
(
8 1 0
.
) 1 1
(
3 4 0
.
) 2 1
(
7 4 0
.
) 5 1
(
9 5 0
.
) 6 1
(
3 6 0
.
) 3 2
(
1 9 0
.
[1-spot]
[2-spot]
[3-spot]
) 4 2
(
. n i 4 9
. 0
) 2 3
(
6 2
. 1
[4-spot]
) 6 1
(
3 6
. 0
) 5
. 4
(
8 1
. 0 Copper Tube Starting Middle of Copper Tube Arbitrary Fixing Reference Points Figure F.2 Pressure Reference Drawing (Handheld Compressor) F-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Unit: in. (mm)
) 5
. 3 1
(
3 5
. 0
) 0 3
(
8 1
. 1
) 1 3
(
2 2
. 1
) 7 4
(
5 8
. 1
) 3 6
(
8 4
. 2
) 8 4
(
9 8
. 1
[2-spot]
[3-spot]
[4-spot]
) 4 6
(
2 5 2
.
) 1 3
(
2 2
. 1
[4-spot]
.
) 5 3 1
(
3 5
. 0 Copper Tube Starting Duplicate Pressure Arbitrary Fixing Reference Points Figure F.3 Pressure Reference Drawing (Hydraulic Press) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. F-3 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly Ver. 4.0 Table F.2 Compressor Specifications per Cable Thickness Press Size Small Handheld Press Large Handheld Press Hydraulic Press
(AK-38, 100)
(IZUMI Hexagonal Dies) 2 2 5.5 8 14 22 38 X X X X X X 8 14 22 38 60 80 X X X X 16 25 35 50 70 100 95~300 Cable Size
(mm2) 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 F-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual F.3 Assembling Pressure Terminal The procedures for assembling a pressure terminal to a cable are as follows:
Strip the Cable Sheath 1) After checking the inside length of a pressure terminal, mark the cable. 2) Adjust the length of a cutter blade according to the sheath thickness of the cable. 3) Push the clamp with a thumb a ccording to the cable size to secure a space for the cable. 4) Put a cable into a clamp, locate a blade on a marking position, and push it into the sheath. 5) Align the stripper to be perpendicular to the cable and rotate it more than two laps. Figure F.4 Stripping Cable Sheath (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. F-5 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly Ver. 4.0 6) Push the lever of the stripper to the right to turn its blade at 90. 7) Move the stripper up to the end of cable while maintaining the stripper to be perpendicular to the cable. 8) Remove the sheath. Figure F.5 Stripping Cable Sheath (2) F-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Checking When Using A Wire Stripper A wire stripper is used differently depending on its manufacturer or type. Therefore, refer to the user manual enclosed with the product. The specifications and cautions of a wire stripper described in this manual are as follows:
Vender: Weidmuller Model: Weidmuller-AM25 (Order No-
9001080000) Specifications: For outer diameter 0.24~0.94 in.
(6~24 mm) PVC clothing Up to 4.5 mm clothing cutting depth
- To prevent the cutter blade of a wire stripper from touching the cable conductor, adjust the length of cutter blade by checking the cable sheath thickness.
- Make sure that the cutter blade goes into the cable sheath completely.
- Rotate the wire stripper perpendicularly to the cable.
[X]
[O]
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. F-7 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly Ver. 4.0 Fixing Pressure Terminal (Handheld Compressor) 1) Insert the conductor of the cable with the sheath stripped to the internal end of pressure terminal. For a ring type pressure terminal, push it in until the conduct comes out 1 mm from the end of the terminal. 2) From the holes of handheld compressor, select one that fits to the pressure terminal. 3) Insert the pressure terminal to the selected hole. 4) Fix the pressure terminal and cable temporarily so the position can be changed later by pressing the compressor. F-8 Figure F.6 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Handheld Compressor (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 5) After complementary of the cable which is temporary fixed, align it to the hole and firmly compress the pressure terminal to secure fix it. 6) Separate the pressure terminal from the handheld compressor. Press down the handle of compressor until a clicking sound is heard to be unlocked. Figure F.7 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Handheld Compressor (2) Checking When Using A Handheld Compressor A handheld compressor is used differently depending on its manufacturer or type. Therefore, refer to the user manual enclosed with the product. The specifications and cautions of a handheld compressor described in this manual are as follows:
Vender: GALLEX Model: GL-2045A-22 Specification: 5.5 mm2, 8 mm2, 14 mm2, 22 mm2 (JIS) 6 mm2, 10 mm2, 16 mm2, 25 mm2 (DIN) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. F-9 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly Ver. 4.0 Fixing Pressure Terminal (Hydraulic Press) 1) Among the dies of the hydraulic press, select one that fits to the pressure terminal. Dies Hydraulic Press 2) Assemble the dies to the pressing area of the compressor. 3) Insert the pressure terminal into the pressing area and fix it slightly by aligning it to the end of cable sheath. Figure F.8 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Hydraulic Press (1) F-10 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 4) Move the compressor lever up and down to press the pressure terminal firmly. 5) Turn the top compressing lever clockwise and then push it down. When the pressing area of compressor is loosened, remove the pressure terminal. Figure F.9 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Hydraulic Press (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. F-11 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly Ver. 4.0 Checking When Using a Hydraulic Press A hydraulic press is used differently depending on its manufacturer or type. Therefore, refer to the user manual enclosed with the product. The specifications and cautions of a hydraulic press described in this manual are as follows:
Vender: IZUMI Model: IZUMI-EP-510B Specification: Circular 32~160 (SQ) Hex 14~325 (SQ) F-12 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Assembling Heat Shrink Tube 1) After assembling a pressure terminal, move the heat shrink tube, inserted to the cable, to the end of pressure terminal copper tube. Heat Shrink Tube Pressure Terminal 2) Set the temperature of the heat gun to 356-392(180-200C). 3) Locate a heat shrink tube to cover the entire copper tube of the pressure terminal. 4) Rotate a heat gun 360 to apply heat evenly to shrink the tube.
(Because the pressure terminal and the cable is hot due to the heat of a heating gun, be careful not to have a burn.) Figure F.10 Assembling Heat Shrink Tube SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. F-13 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly Ver. 4.0 This page is intentionally left blank. F-14 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ANNEX G. Standard Torque When you tighten the bolt, refer to the standard torque value below to prevent the equipment and bolt from damage and secure by tightening. When the torque value for each connection part is defined already, refer to the defined value. Table G.1 Standard Torque Value for Tightening Bolts Bolt Spec. Torque Value (kgf.cm) Torque Value (N.m) Torque Value (lbf.ft) M3 M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 4.08~6.12 9.52~14.28 20.0~30.0 33.28~49.92 82.4~123.6 166.4~249.6 292.0~438.0 0.40~0.60 0.93~1.40 1.96~2.94 3.26~4.90 8.08~12.12 0.29~0.44 0.69~1.03 1.45~2.17 2.41~3.61 5.96~8.94 16.32~24.48 12.03~18.05 28.64~42.65 21.11~31.67 Table G.2 Brass Bolts Torque Value Bolt Spec. Torque Value (kgf.cm) Torque Value (N.m) Torque Value (lbf.ft) M6 M8 29.98 10 %
64.26 10 %
2.94 10 %
6.3 10 %
2.17 10 %
4.16 10 %
Checking Standard Torque Value Torque value can be different, defending on the material, characteristic and specification of the equipment and fastener. Make sure to check the proper torque value for each specification of the equipment and fastener. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. G-1 Ver. 2600-00F1W8GAA ANNEX G. Standard Torque 4.0 This page is intentionally left blank. G-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ABBREVIATION C D E L M R T U CPRI DU eNB L9CA LTE MGB MIMO RET RF RRH TGB UADU UAMA Common Public Radio Interface Digital Unit evolved UTRAN Node-B LTE eNB Channel card board Assembly Long Term Evolution Main Ground Bar Multiple-Input Multiple-Output Remote Electrical Tilt Radio Frequency Remote Radio Head Tower Ground Bar Universal Platform type A Digital Unit Universal platform type A Management board Assembly SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. I 2600-00F1W8GAA ABBREVIATION Ver. 4.0 V VSWR Voltage Standing Waveform Ratio II SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. MPE Information Warning: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. In order to avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna should not be less than 300 cm during normal operation. The gain of the antenna is 17.0 dBi. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 2012 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Information in this manual is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. No information contained here may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated by any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG. Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
1 2 3 4 | User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.72 MiB | December 20 2012 / June 18 2013 |
2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 COPYRIGHT This manual is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. and is protected by copyright. No information contained herein may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated for any commercial purposes or disclosed to the third party in any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. TRADEMARKS Product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective companies. This manual should be read and used as a guideline for properly installing and operating the product. This manual may be changed for the system improvement, standardization and other technical reasons without prior notice. If you need updated manuals or have any questions concerning the contents of the manuals, contact our Document Center at the following address or Web site:
Address: Document Center 3rd Floor Jeong-bo-tong-sin-dong. Dong-Suwon P.O. Box 105, 416, Maetan-3dong Yeongtong-gu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea 442-600 Homepage: http://www.samsungdocs.com 2012 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual INTRODUCTION Purpose This manual describes how to install the RRH-B4 and how to connect cables. RRH-B4 can be connected to the following systems:
U-RAS Flexible V2 DU, which is a Base Station (BS) of Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE multi-mode Smart MBS UADU, which is an eNB of TD-LTE Document Content and Organization This document consists of 4 Chapters, 7 Annex and Abbreviation, which are summarized as follows:
CHAPTER 1. Before Installation This chapter introduces the safety rules that must be understood for installing the RRH-B4 and describes the block diagram of the RRH-B4. CHAPTER 2. Installing System This chapter describes the procedures to install the RRH-B4. CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables This chapter describes the procedures to connect the cables to the RRH-B4 installed. CHAPTER 4. Checking Installation Status This chapter describes the procedures of inspecting installation status after RRH-B4 installation and cabling is completed. ANNEX A. Sector Antenna Installation This annex describes the sector antenna configurations and its installation requirements. ANNEX B. Installing Feeder Cable This annex describes cautions and allowed radius of curvature when installing feeder line. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. I 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 INTRODUCTION ANNEX C. Connector Assembly This annex describes the procedure of assembling the connector. ANNEX D. Cleaning Optic Connector This annex describes the procedure of cleaning the optic connector and cleaning tool. ANNEX E. Cable Gland Assembly This annex describes the procedure of assembling the cable gland. ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly This annex describes the procedure of assembling the pressure terminal. ANNEX G. Standard Torque This annex describes the standard torque when tightening the bolt. ABBREVIATION Describes the acronyms used in this manual. Conventions The following types of paragraphs contain special information that must be carefully read and thoroughly understood. Such information may or may not be enclosed in a rectangular box, separating it from the main text, but is always preceded by an icon and/or a bold title. WARNING Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid personal injury or fatality. CAUTION Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid a service failure or damage to the system. CHECKPOINT Provides the operator with checkpoints for stable system operation. II SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual NOTE Indicates additional information as a reference. Revision History VERSION DATE OF ISSUE REMARKS 4.0 3.0 11. 2012. Changed Specifications (Main Specifications, Environmental Condition, and RF Specification) 10. 2012.
- Changed System Consumption Current (1.2)
- Changed Cable Gland Specification: M20 22051y7 M25 2253y8 (Figure 1.2 and Figure 3.22) 2.0 09. 2012.
- Added contents for Smart MBS
- U-RAS Flexible V2: WiMAX only WiMAX/TD-LTE multi-
1.0 08. 2012. First Version mode support SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. III 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 INTRODUCTION This page is intentionally left blank. IV SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual SAFETY CONCERNS The purpose of the Safety Concerns section is to ensure the safety of users and prevent property damage. Please read this document carefully for proper use. Symbols Caution Indication of a general caution Restriction Indication for prohibiting an action for a product Instruction Indication for commanding a specifically required action SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. V 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 SAFETY CONCERNS Warning WARNING Power and Grounding Cautions When Using Insulation Tester Pay attention to the followings to prevent any personal injury caused by an electric shock when using an insulation tester.
- Make sure the polarity is correct when connecting the Earth COM (black) and AC.V (red) lead lines. And do not touch the connected probes (inspecting part of the lead line) with a hand and avoid body contact.
- Avoid body contact to the system when measuring an insulation resistance. Watches, rings, and other metallic accessories Do not wear accessories such as watches and rings in order to prevent electrical shock. Power Switch Off Make sure the power switch of power supplier is off when installing the system. Installing the system with power switch on may cause system damage or fatal human injury when cables are not correctly connected. Connecting Ground Cable When connecting the cables, always connect the ground cable first. If worker contacts the equipment, connect a cable or perform maintenance without connecting the ground cable, the system can be damaged or a worker may be injured due to static electricity and short circuit. Turning Off the Circuit Breaker before Connecting the Power Cable Since power is applied to the system where the power cable is connected by manipulating the circuit breaker of the rectifier, be sure to check the rectifiers breaker is turned off (open) before connecting the power cable to the power connector. If the system is installed while the circuit breaker is on, the worker may be critically injured as soon as the cable is connected in the wrong way. VI SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Installation Warning for Laser Beam Running through Optical Cables In the system, the laser beam emitting light runs through the optical cable. The exposure of the laser beam on workers eye may cause serious injury so that it should be handled with care. Warning for Workers Injury When installing cables in a small area, do not apply excessive force. Worker may bump against a wall or equipment. Protection gloves and goggles Make sure that worker wears protection gloves and goggles to prevent damages from debris while drilling holes in a wall or ceiling. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. VII 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 SAFETY CONCERNS Caution CAUTION Power and Feeder line Cautions while Cleaning Power Supply While cleaning the power supply device, take caution that the device does not come in contact with alien bodies that may cause power failure. Precautions While Measuring Insulation Resistance Observe the followings to prevent any system damage when measuring insulation resistance because there is a very high voltage.
- Before measuring insulation resistance, disconnect all the cables connected to the system.
- Do not measure insulation resistance when power is on.
- Do not measure insulation resistance at any other positions such as system internal units or parts other than the targeted insulation resistance measuring points. System Grounding Method Ground bar for lightning protector/power/communication must be isolated from each other. These three ground bars can be grounded as the isolation grounding method, or branched from ground mesh buried in the underground as common grounding method. Precautions When Connecting Power Cable To secure rainproof performance of a cable gland, min. 11.81 in. (300 mm) straight section must be maintained. Here, the radius of curvature must be considered according to the cable specification. When Using Power Cables
- W hen handling the power cable, ensure the power switch of a rectifier is turned off to prevent the risk from the power cable and electric short-circuit of related cables.
- Because a power accident may occur when fixing parts get loosened, make sure that fasteners to fix the power cable should be firmly fastened. VIII SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Check When Fixing the Power Cable Fix the power cable and the power cable bracket using a stainless steel tie for preventing loose contact due to cable tension and leakage problems. It is recommended to use the designated tools to tighten the stainless steel tie. Caution for Rain-proof Gasket Damage Be careful the rain-proof gasket is not damaged during work, and check again the gasket is not damaged before closing power/DTA window cover. If the rain-proof gasket is damaged, replace the RRH-B4. Power Window Cover Be sure to check the circuit breaker for RRH-B4 is turned off before opening or closing the power window cover. If the cover is open or close while the circuit breaker is on, the system can be damaged or a worker may be critically injured due to electrical short-circuit. Precautions When Cutting Power Cable Install the power cable to the power port of system by considering the radius of curvature of its cable specification and then cut the cable. If you install the cable after cutting, there may be length difference among the core wires at the end of the cable because of cable curvature. This may result in poor contact after the cable is connected to the power port. Installing the Antenna When you install the antenna, the antenna must be within the protective angle
(left/right side 45 each from the central axis) to prevent the antenna from lightning damage. Checking VSWR for Minimum Cable Bend Radius and Length of RF Cable If the VSW R value for minimum cable bend radius and length of RF cable is not applied, system may not work properly because RF signals cannot transmit or receive smoothly. So, the VSWR value for minimum cable bend radius and length of RF cable must be checked and applied. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. IX 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 SAFETY CONCERNS Cautions When Measuring VSWR When measuring VSWR, if you open the antenna port when the transmission output is not completely off, a spike signal may flow into the reception path, which may cause damage to LNA. Make sure the transmission output is completely off when measuring VSWR. Cable Work Sequence When performing cable work for the system, proceed with the ground work before any other work to prevent errors occurring due to static electricity and other reasons. Radius of Curvature of Feeder Line When installing a feeder line, the radius of curvature of the sections where cables bent should be larger than the allowed radius of curvature. If the radius of curvature for the feeder line installation is less than the allowed radius of curvature, it may affect the performance of the system. Connection of Feeder Cable Connector Connecting the feeder cable connector is critical process, so the qualified workers who finished the related education should perform. Installation Cautions while Cleaning the Rack Make sure that worker does not damage installed cables while cleaning the rack. Do not Work by Yourself Worker must not work alone in any key process. Managing Unused Ports Never allow foreign substances to be inserted into unused ports by covering them with a dust cap. X SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Finishing the Cable Inlet To prevent foreign substances, outdoor air and moisture from entering the cable inlet (including cable gland and conduit), finish it as follows:
- Unused inlet Use the hole finishing materials including dust cap and rubber packing.
- Cable-installed inlet After cable installation, block any space in the inlet with tape, compressed sponge, rubber packing, and silicon. Management of Unused Ports Cover the unused ports (conduit, cable gland, etc.) with waterproof cap (sealing cap) to prevent infiltration of foreign material such as dust, moisture, or bug. Caution When Connecting the Optical Cable Check whether there is dust or foreign material on the cutting section of the connector core before connecting the optic cable, and keep this away from dust or foreign material. If the cable is soiled with foreign material, do not blow to remove them. Make sure to clean the connector in accordance with the cleaning directions in ANNEX D. Caution When Assembling Cable Gland If the parts of a cable gland in the system are not correctly installed, outdoor air and moisture may flow into the system and cause corrosion, system fault, or serious fault to the cooling system. Therefore, assemble and finish the cable gland accurately. Caution When Installing Cable in the Cable Gland Only one cable of permitted specification (thickness) should be installed in the cable gland.
- The outdoor air or moisture may flow into the system if a cable that is thinner than the specification is used.
- If a cable is thicker than the specification or more than two cables are installed, the cable gland may be damaged. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XI 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 SAFETY CONCERNS Checking Assembly State of the Unused Cable Gland All components of the unused cable gland must be secured in the original factory configuration. If the cable gland nut is fitted without the waterproof filler or the protection cover in place, reassemble them as illustrated in Unused Cable Gland Inspection and Assembly. California USA Only This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. XII SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION I Purpose ............................................................................................................................................................... I Document Content and Organization .............................................................................................................. I Conventions .......................................................................................................................................................II Revision History................................................................................................................................................III SAFETY CONCERNS V Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................. V Warning............................................................................................................................................................. VI Caution............................................................................................................................................................ VIII California USA Only ....................................................................................................................................... XII CHAPTER 1. Before Installation 1-1 1.1 System Configuration............................................................................................................ 1-1 1.2 Specifications......................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.3 Cautions for Installation ........................................................................................................ 1-6 1.4 Pre-survey .............................................................................................................................. 1-8 1.5 Installation Tools ................................................................................................................... 1-9 CHAPTER 2. Installing System 2-1 2.1 Installing the RRH-B4 ............................................................................................................ 2-1 2.2 Foundation Work ................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 System Arrangement ..................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.2.2 Marking and Drilling ....................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.3 Unpacking and Transporting ................................................................................................ 2-6 2.3.1 Importing Items ............................................................................................................................... 2-6 2.3.2 Unpacking Items ............................................................................................................................. 2-6 2.4 Fixing System......................................................................................................................... 2-7 2.4.1 Fixing Unit Mounting Bracket ........................................................................................................ 2-7 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XIII 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.4.2 Fixing RRH-B4................................................................................................................................2-9 2.5 System Leveling ................................................................................................................... 2-14 2.6 Insulation Test...................................................................................................................... 2-15 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 3-1 3.1 Work Flow for Cabling ........................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Cabling .................................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.3 Grounding ............................................................................................................................... 3-8 3.3.1 Grounding the System ...................................................................................................................3-9 3.4 Power Cabling ...................................................................................................................... 3-11 3.4.1 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable ..................................................................................... 3-12 3.4.2 Power Test .................................................................................................................................... 3-31 3.5 External Interface Construction......................................................................................... 3-32 3.5.1 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection........................................................................... 3-32 3.5.2 RET Cable Connection ............................................................................................................... 3-70 3.5.3 RF Cable Connection .................................................................................................................. 3-73 CHAPTER 4. Checking Installation Status 4-1 4.1 Installation Checking Procedure ........................................................................................... 4-1 ANNEX A. Sector Antenna Installation A-1 A.1 Cautions when Installing a Sector Antenna ........................................................................ A-1 A.2 Sector Antenna Layout ......................................................................................................... A-1 A.3 Sector Antenna Installation .................................................................................................. A-2 ANNEX B. Installing Feeder Cable B-1 B.1 Cautions When Installing Feeder Cable .............................................................................. B-1 B.2 7/8 in. Feeder Line Ground ................................................................................................... B-4 B.3 Tower Ground Construction ................................................................................................. B-8 ANNEX C. Connector Assembly C-1 C.1 RJ-45 (Shield Type) ............................................................................................................... C-1 C.2 RJ-45 (Normal Type) .............................................................................................................. C-3 C.3 N type-male (LMR-400) .......................................................................................................... C-4 XIV SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual C.4 TNC-male (LMR-400) .............................................................................................................. C-6 C.5 N type-male (1/2 in. feeder line) ............................................................................................ C-8 C.6 Din type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) ..................................................................................... C-12 C.7 Finishing the Connector Connection Part by Tape ........................................................... C-14 C.8 How to Shrink the Heat Shrink Tube .................................................................................. C-15 C.8.1 When Assembling a Connector to the Feeder Line................................................................ C-15 C.8.2 When Connecting a Connector to another Connector........................................................... C-17 ANNEX D. Cleaning Optic Connector D-1 D.1 Cleaning Optic Connector ..................................................................................................... D-1 D.2 IBCTM Brand Cleaner .............................................................................................................. D-2 D.2.1 IBCTM Brand Type Cleaner (P/N 9393) ...................................................................................... D-2 ANNEX E. Cable Gland Assembly E-1 E.1 Cable Gland Components ..................................................................................................... E-2 E.2 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling ..................................................................................... E-3 E.3 Unused Cable Gland Inspection and Assembly .................................................................. E-6 ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly F-1 F.1 Preparations ........................................................................................................................... F-1 F.2 Pressure Reference Table ..................................................................................................... F-2 F.3 Assembling Pressure Terminal............................................................................................. F-5 ANNEX G. Standard Torque ABBREVIATION G-1 I C ~ U ................................................................................................................................................................... I V
..................................................................................................................................................................II SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XV 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1.1 RRH-B4 Configuration .......................................................................................... 1-1 Figure 1.2 External Interface of RRH-B4................................................................................. 1-2 Figure 2.1 Procedure to Install the RRH-B4 ............................................................................ 2-1 Figure 2.2 RRH-B4 Arragement (Wall Type) ........................................................................... 2-2 Figure 2.3 RRH-B4 Arragement (Sector Pole Type)................................................................ 2-3 Figure 2.4 System Marking-Wall Type..................................................................................... 2-4 Figure 2.5 Fixing Unit Mounting Bracket ................................................................................. 2-8 Figure 2.6 Fixing RRH-B4 (Wall Type) .................................................................................. 2-10 Figure 2.7 Fixing RRH-B4 (Pole Type) .................................................................................. 2-12 Figure 2.8 Leveling Using a Level (Example)........................................................................ 2-14 Figure 2.9 Schematic Diagram for Insulation Test (Wall Type) .............................................. 2-16 Figure 2.10 Schematic Diagram for Insulation Test (Pole Type)............................................ 2-16 Figure 3.1 Work Flow for System Cabling ............................................................................... 3-1 Figure 3.2 Detailed Cabling Procedure ................................................................................... 3-2 Figure 3.3 Cabling Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-6 Figure 3.4 Connection of the RRH-B4 Ground Cable ........................................................... 3-10 Figure 3.5 Power Equipment Diagram .................................................................................. 3-11 Figure 3.6 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (1) ............................................... 3-14 Figure 3.7 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (2) ............................................... 3-15 Figure 3.8 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (3) ............................................... 3-17 Figure 3.9 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (4) ............................................... 3-18 Figure 3.10 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (5) ............................................. 3-19 Figure 3.11 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (6).............................................. 3-20 Figure 3.12 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (7) ............................................. 3-21 Figure 3.13 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (1) ........................................... 3-24 Figure 3.14 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (2) ........................................... 3-25 Figure 3.15 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (3) ........................................... 3-26 Figure 3.16 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (4) ........................................... 3-27 Figure 3.17 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (5) ........................................... 3-28 Figure 3.18 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (6) ........................................... 3-29 Figure 3.19 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (7) ........................................... 3-30 Figure 3.20 Specifications of CPRI Cable and Connector ..................................................... 3-32 Figure 3.21 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (1) ................................................ 3-33 Figure 3.22 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (2) ................................................ 3-34 Figure 3.23 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (3) ................................................ 3-35 XVI SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Figure 3.24 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (4) ............................................... 3-36 Figure 3.25 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (5) ............................................... 3-37 Figure 3.26 CPRI Cable Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1) ......................................... 3-39 Figure 3.27 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1 (1) ................................ 3-40 Figure 3.28 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1 (2) ................................ 3-41 Figure 3.29 CPRI Cable Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2) ......................................... 3-43 Figure 3.30 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2 (1) ................................ 3-44 Figure 3.31 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2 (2) ................................ 3-45 Figure 3.32 CPRI Cable Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3) ......................................... 3-47 Figure 3.33 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3 (1) ................................ 3-48 Figure 3.34 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3 (2) ................................ 3-49 Figure 3.35 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #1) .................................................... 3-51 Figure 3.36 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #1 (1) ........................................... 3-52 Figure 3.37 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #1 (2) ........................................... 3-53 Figure 3.38 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #2) .................................................... 3-54 Figure 3.39 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #2 (1) ........................................... 3-55 Figure 3.40 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #2 (2) ........................................... 3-56 Figure 3.41 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Stacking, Case #1) ......................................................... 3-58 Figure 3.42 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #1 (1) ................................................ 3-59 Figure 3.43 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #1 (2) ................................................ 3-60 Figure 3.44 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Stacking, Case #2) ......................................................... 3-62 Figure 3.45 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #2 (1) ................................................ 3-63 Figure 3.46 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #2 (2) ................................................ 3-64 Figure 3.47 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #2 (3) ................................................ 3-65 Figure 3.48 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Stacking, Case #3) ......................................................... 3-67 Figure 3.49 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #3 (1) ................................................ 3-68 Figure 3.50 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case# 3 (2) ................................................ 3-69 Figure 3.51 RET Cable Connection (1) ................................................................................ 3-70 Figure 3.52 RET Cable Connection (2) ................................................................................ 3-71 Figure 3.53 RET Cable Connector ....................................................................................... 3-72 Figure 3.54 RF Cable Configuration ..................................................................................... 3-75 Figure 3.55 RF Cable Connection (1) ................................................................................... 3-76 Figure 3.56 RF Cable Connection (2) ................................................................................... 3-77 Figure 4.1 Installation Checking Procedure ............................................................................ 4-1 Figure A.1 Sector Antenna...................................................................................................... A-3 Figure B.1 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (1) ......................................................................... B-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XVII 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS Figure B.2 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (2)......................................................................... B-5 Figure B.3 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (3)......................................................................... B-6 Figure B.4 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (4)......................................................................... B-7 Figure B.5 Connecting the Tower Ground Cable .................................................................... B-8 Figure C.1 Assembling the RJ-45 Connector (Shield Type) (1) ............................................. C-1 Figure C.2 Assembling the RJ-45 Connector (Shield Type) (2) ............................................. C-2 Figure C.3 Assembling the RJ-45 Connector (Normal Type) ................................................. C-3 Figure C.4 N type-male Connector Assembling (1) ................................................................ C-4 Figure C.5 N type-male Connector Assembling (2) ................................................................ C-5 Figure C.6 TNC-male Connector Assembling (1) ................................................................... C-6 Figure C.7 TNC-male Connector Assembling (2) ................................................................... C-7 Figure C.8 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (1)......................... C-8 Figure C.9 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (2)......................... C-9 Figure C.10 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (3)..................... C-10 Figure C.11 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (4) ..................... C-11 Figure C.12 Assembling the Din type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (1) .................. C-12 Figure C.13 Assembling the Din type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (2) .................. C-13 Figure C.14 Finishing the Connector Connection Part by Tape ........................................... C-14 Figure C.15 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Feeder Line (1) ............................................. C-15 Figure C.16 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Feeder Line (2) ............................................. C-16 Figure C.17 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Connection between Connectors (1)............. C-17 Figure C.18 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Connection between Connectors (2)............. C-18 Figure C.19 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Connection between Connectors (3)............. C-19 Figure D.1 Optic Connector Cleaner (IBC TM Brand Type Cleaner: P/N 9393)........................ D-2 Figure D.2 Optic Module Cleaning (LC Type Jack) ................................................................ D-3 Figure D.3 Optic Cable Connector Cleaning (LC Type Plug) ................................................. D-4 Figure D.4 Measuring the Optical Output and Connecting the Optic Connector .................... D-5 Figure E.1 Cable Gland Components .................................................................................... E-2 Figure E.2 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling (1) ................................................................ E-3 Figure E.3 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling (2) ................................................................ E-4 Figure E.4 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling (3) ................................................................ E-5 Figure E.5 Unused Cable Gland Inspection and Assembly .................................................... E-6 Figure F.1 Preparations ...........................................................................................................F-1 Figure F.2 Pressure Reference Drawing (Handheld Compressor) ..........................................F-2 Figure F.3 Pressure Reference Drawing (Hydraulic Press) .....................................................F-3 XVIII SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Figure F.4 Stripping Cable Sheath (1)..................................................................................... F-5 Figure F.5 Stripping Cable Sheath (2)..................................................................................... F-6 Figure F.6 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Handheld Compressor (1) ............................................ F-8 Figure F.7 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Handheld Compressor (2) ............................................ F-9 Figure F.8 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Hydraulic Press (1) ..................................................... F-10 Figure F.9 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Hydraulic Press (2) ..................................................... F-11 Figure F.10 Assembling Heat Shrink Tube ........................................................................... F-13 LIST OF TABLES Table 1.1 Basic Installation Tools ............................................................................................ 1-9 Table 2.1 Recommended Distances for RRH-B4 Installation.................................................. 2-2 Table 2.2 Anchor Bolt Drill Bits and Hole Depth...................................................................... 2-5 Table 2.3 Unit Mounting Bracket Fixing Parts And Tool .......................................................... 2-7 Table 2.4 RRH-B4 Fixing Parts and Tools (Wall Type) ............................................................ 2-9 Table 2.5 RRH-B4 Fixing Parts and Tools (Pole Type) ..........................................................2-11 Table 2.6 Leveling Using a Level .......................................................................................... 2-14 Table 2.7 Insulation Test ...................................................................................................... 2-15 Table 3.1 Recommended Minimum Allowed Cable Bend Radius ........................................... 3-3 Table 3.2 RRH-B4 Connection Cable .................................................................................... 3-7 Table 3.3 Grounding the RRH-B4 (MGB~RRH-B4) ................................................................ 3-9 Table 3.4 Connecting the DC Power Cable (AW G8, DC Distributor~RRH-B4) ..................... 3-12 Table 3.5 Connecting the DC Power Cable (AW G10, DC Distributor~RRH-B4) ................... 3-22 Table 3.6 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection ...................................................................... 3-32 Table 3.7 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1) ........................... 3-38 Table 3.8 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2) ........................... 3-42 Table 3.9 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3) ........................... 3-46 Table 3.10 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #1) .................................... 3-50 Table 3.11 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #2) ..................................... 3-54 Table 3.12 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Stacking, Case #1) ......................................... 3-57 Table 3.13 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Stacking, Case #2) ......................................... 3-61 Table 3.14 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Stacking, Case #3) ......................................... 3-66 Table 3.15 RET Cable Connection ....................................................................................... 3-70 Table 3.16 RET Cable Connector Pin Map ........................................................................... 3-72 Table 3.17 RF Cable Connection .......................................................................................... 3-73 Table 3.18 RF Cable Connection at Antenna Connection Area ............................................ 3-74 Table 3.19 RF Cable Identification Tag ................................................................................. 3-75 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XIX 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS Table 4.1 Construction Situation Checklist .............................................................................. 4-2 Table B.1 Curvature Radius of Feeder Cable for Outdoor...................................................... B-1 Table B.2 Curvature Radius of Feeder Cable for Indoor (Based on LS Feeder Line) ............ B-2 Table B.3 Curvature Radius of LMR-400 (Based on Times Microwave System).................... B-2 Table B.4 Connector Connection Torque Value ...................................................................... B-3 Table B.5 TGB Installation Example ....................................................................................... B-7 Table F.1 Pressure Reference Table for Pressure Terminal ....................................................F-2 Table F.2 Compressor Specifications per Cable Thickness .....................................................F-4 Table G.1 Standard Torque Value for Tightening Bolts ........................................................... G-1 Table G.2 Brass Bolts Torque Value ....................................................................................... G-1 XX SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual CHAPTER 1. Before Installation 1.1 System Configuration RRH-B4 Configuration The configuration of RRH-B4 is as follows:
Unit: in. (mm)
.
) 5 7 0 2
(
7 1 8
. 13.78 (350)
[Top View]
13.78 (350)
) 0 5 5
(
5 6 1 2
.
[Left View]
[Front View]
[Right View]
[Rear View]
[Bottom View]
Figure 1.1 RRH-B4 Configuration SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-1 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 1. Before Installation External Interface of RRH-B4 The external interface structure of RRH-B4 is as follows:
Optic (Gland M25: 22553y8) ANT_0 ANT_1 ANT_2 ANT_3 Ground Terminal DC Power (Gland M25: 22553y16) RET
[Bottom View]
Figure 1.2 External Interface of RRH-B4 1-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 1.2 Specifications Main Specifications The table below lists the main specifications of the system. Category System Capacity Air specification WiMAX/TD-LTE Channel Bandwidth
- Mobile WiMAX: 10 MHz
- TD-LTE: 20 MHz Operating Frequency 2,496~2,690 MHz (BC41) RRH-B4 Capacity
- WiMAX 4 Carriers
- TD-LTE 2 Carriers Interface between DU and RRH-B4
- WiMAX: 1.25 Gbps CPRI Output Input Power
- TD-LTE: 2.5 Gbps CPRI Antenna port based
- WiMAX: 5 W/Carrier/Path
- TD-LTE: 20 W /Carrier/Path The table below lists the power standard for the RRH-B4. The RRH-B4satisfies the electrical safety standard prescribed in UL60950. If an operator wants to use AC system input voltage, the operator can supply power using an external rectifier (provided by a service provider). Category Standard System Input Voltage
-48 VDC (Voltage Variation Range: -40~-56 VDC) System Consumption Current 9.27 A AVG. @ 48 V, 28: 18 (DL UL ratio)
* Each of the DU (UADU) and RRH-B4 receives -48 VDC of power for its operation. Unit Size and Weight The table below lists the size and weight of the RRH-B4. Category Standard Size [W D H, in. (mm)]
13.8 (350) 8 (207.5) 21.7 (550) Weight [lb (kg)]
About 50.7 (23) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-3 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 1. Before Installation Environmental Condition The table below lists the environmental conditions and related standards such as operational temperature and humidity. Category Range Temperature Condition a)
-40~122F (-40~+50C) Humidity Condition a) 5~100 %, condensing, not to exceed 30 g/m3 absolute humidity Altitude Vibration
-197~5,905 ft (-60~1,800 m) GR-487-CORE Sec.3.39
- Transportation shock
- Transportation vibration
- Installation shock
- Environmentally induced vibration
- Earthquake resistance Sound Pressure Level Under 65 dBA in height of 3 ft (1.0 m) and distance of 5 ft (1.5 m). EMI
- FCC Title 47 Part 15 Class B
- EN 301 489 Section 7.1 EMC emission
- GR-1089-CORE (Issue4) Sec. 3.2 Emission Criteria US Federal Regulation FCC Title 47 Part 27 a) The standards of temperature/humidity conditions are based on the value on the position where is 15.75 in. (400 mm) away from the front of the system and in the height of 4.92 ft (1.5 m) on the bottom. Environmental Alarm The table below lists the environmental alarm provided in the Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 in default. Category Standard Temperature Alarm High Temperature, Low Temperature Fan Fail Fan Fail Voltage Alarm High Voltage, Low Voltage 1-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual RF Specification The table below lists the RF characteristics of the RRH-B4. Category Standard Total Tx Output Power
- Mobile WiMAX, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth 20 W @ avg power per carrier/sector, 4T4R 10 W @ avg power per carrier/sector, 2T2R/2T4R
- TD-LTE, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth 40 W @ avg power per carrier/sector, 4T4R 20 W @ avg power per carrier/sector, 2T2R/2T4R Tx Constellation error
- Mobile WiMAX: In accordance with the 802.16e RCT standard
- TD-LTE: In accordance with the 3GPP LTE standard RX Sensitivity
- Mobile WiMAX: In accordance with the 802.16e RCT standard
- TD-LTE: In accordance with the 3GPP LTE standard SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-5 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 1. Before Installation 1.3 Cautions for Installation Observe the following safety instructions when installing the RRH-B4:
Before Installing Post warning signs in areas where high-voltage cables are installed. Post off limit signs in areas where accidents are most expected. With guardrails or fences, block open areas such as connecting parts, roof, and scaffold. While Installing The power must be cut off before installing. Be careful that boards mounted on the system and the cables among the boards are damaged or scratched when the system is transported or installed. Wearing Protective Gloves and Glasses The workers should wear the protective gloves and glasses because they can be injured by the debris generated when drilling holes on walls or ceilings. Do Not Wear Metal Things such as Watch, Ring, Etc. Do not let the electric short circuit occur due to metal things such as watch or ring. Warning for Workers Injury When installing cables in a small area, do not apply excessive force. Worker may bump against a wall or equipment. Do not Work by Yourself Worker must not work alone in any key process. Managing Unused Ports Never allow foreign substances to be inserted into unused ports by covering them with a dust cap. 1-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Finishing the Cable Inlet To prevent foreign substances, outdoor air and moisture from entering the cable inlet (including cable gland and conduit), finish it as follows:
- Unused inlet Use the hole finishing materials including dust cap and rubber packing.
- Cable-installed inlet After cable installation, block any space in the inlet with tape, compressed sponge, rubber packing, and silicon. Outdoor Fastening Materials The outdoor fastening materials such as stud bolts, hex. nuts, spring washers and plane washers must be made of stainless steel (STS 304). Otherwise, it may cause corrosion and rust to fixing materials. After Installing Cover the cable holes drilled on the floor with a solid cover. Remove any debris produced during the work and clean up the installation site. Warning for Laser Beam Running through Optical Cables In the system, the laser beam emitting light runs through the optical cable. The exposure of the laser beam on workers eye may cause serious injury so that it should be handled with care. Cautions while Cleaning the Rack Make sure that worker does not damage installed cables while cleaning the rack. Cautions while Cleaning Power Supply While cleaning the power supply device, take caution that the device does not come in contact with alien bodies that may cause power failure. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-7 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 1. Before Installation 1.4 Pre-survey To enable seamless construction, the installer and the service provider should perform pre-
construction inspection to examine and analyze the following items. Examination about the conformance and the economical efficiency of the place that the system is transported or installed. Status of external interfaces Power capacity and wiring status Possibility of system extension Review if the place has the enough space to operate and maintain. If there is a need for improvement or an issue, the installer and the service provider must discuss measures to resolve any issue arising. 1-8 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 1.5 Installation Tools The basic tools for installation are listed in the table below. The additional tools required for each site need to identified and prepared during a site survey before starting installation. Table 1.1 Basic Installation Tools No. Name Specification 1 Torque driver set 2 Torque wrench set No.0~+ No.3 (M2.6~M6 + Driver) 0.07~4.34 lbfft (1.0~60 kgf.cm) M6~M12 0.72~2.17 lbfft (10~30 kgf.cm), 7.23~36.15 lbfft (100~500 kgf.cm), Replaceable head Nut driver set 0.24~0.39 in. (6~10 mm) Hacksaw Frame/Blade Normal/HIS Level/Plumb bobs Normal/1.10 lb (500 g) Heating gun Torx Driver 122~572F (50~300C) T20H Power extension cable 98.42 ft (30 m) Tape measure Cable cutter 16.4 ft/164 ft (5 m/50 m) 12.8 in. (325 mm) Silicon gun/Silicon Normal/Gray & Colorless Spanner 0.75 in. 0.94 in. 1.42 in. (19 mm, 24 mm, 36 mm) Precautions when Using the Installation Tools:
The required installation tools may vary depending on the conditions at the site. In addition to the basic tools, a protractor, compass, GPS receiver, ladder, safety equipment, cleaning tools etc. should also be prepared in consideration of the site conditions. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-9 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 1. Before Installation This page is intentionally left blank. 1-10 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual CHAPTER 2. Installing System 2.1 Installing the RRH-B4 The procedure to install the RRH-B4 is listed in the flow chart below. Foundation Work Unpacking and Transporting System Arrangement Marking and Drilling Importing Items Unpacking Items Fixing System System Leveling Installation Test Figure 2.1 Procedure to Install the RRH-B4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-1 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System 2.2 Foundation Work 2.2.1 System Arrangement A minimum distance must be secured around the RRH-B4, in each direction for installation and maintenance. Table 2.1 Recommended Distances for RRH-B4 Installation Category Recommended Distances Front/Rear Side
) 0 5 5
(
5 6 1 2
. 31.5 in. (800 mm) or more 23.62 in. (600 mm) or more Unit: in. (mm)
.
) 5 7 0 2
(
7 1 8
. 15.35 (390)
[Left View]
[Top View]
Figure 2.2 RRH-B4 Arragement (Wall Type) 2-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual
) 0 5 5
(
5 6 1 2
. Unit: in. (mm)
) 0 0 3
(
1 8 1 1
. 13.78 (350) 5.57
(141.6)
[Front View]
[Top View]
Figure 2.3 RRH-B4 Arragement (Sector Pole Type) System Installation Spaces The space specifications in the figure above apply when the pole diameter is 3 in.
(76.3 mm). The dimensions may vary depending on the diameter of the pole. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-3 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System 2.2.2 Marking and Drilling Marking Before placing the system, mark the position where the system will be installed and also the positions where anchor bolts will be fixed using an ink line or a pen. Checking Marking (horizontal/vertical) When Mounting the System on Wall If you do the drilling or anchoring on a wall when the positions are not marked to be horizontal or vertical, only limited range of tuning is allowed for leveling after the system is mounted. To mount the system on a wall, perform the leveling test by referring to System Leveling to check the positions are marked to be horizontal or vertical before drilling. If the result shows they are not horizontal or vertical, modify the marking positions. Marking Using the System When the position where the system will be placed is determined, place the system on the position and then mark the positions where anchor bolts will be fixed using a pen. This will reduce marking error range caused by a worker. 10.49 (266.5) Unit: in. (mm)
) 0 5 5
(
5 6 1 2
.
) 5 0 4
(
4 9 5 1
. Anchor Bolt Hole ( 14) 8.17 (207.5)
[Rigt View]
Figure 2.4 System Marking-Wall Type 2-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Drilling When marking is completed, drill holes for anchor bolts. Table 2.2 Anchor Bolt Drill Bits and Hole Depth Category Anchor Bolt Drill Bits Hole Depth RRH-B4 (Wall Type) M12 0.67 in. (17 mm) 2.17 in. (55 mm) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-5 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System 2.3 Unpacking and Transporting This paragraph describes the work to unpack cabinets and other components and transport them to the place to be installed. The cabinet is externally packed and cabinet and other components are individually packed. The external packing must be unpacked in the outside. If necessary, the packing can be unpacked after transported into the area near installation place. Transport the cabinet to the installation place. Beware of the damage of walls, pillars, and bottom of the passage when transporting the cabinet. Transport other components with packing and sort by types. 2.3.1 Importing Items Bring in items, taking care of the followings:
Regarding equipment weight and size, check the path to bring the equipment. Lay Iron and veneer boards on stairs or doorsills to make the transportation easy. When bring in equipment, beware of damage or impairment of main entrance, walls, pillars, and floors of the station. Prepare protection materials and fix them with a high-
strength adhesive. Vibration Level for Transportation When carrying the system, tighten the system firmly not to exceed the proper vibration level from 1 to 500 Hz. When carrying system, use a cart or lift to prevent accidents. However, if the system must be carried by people, enough people are required to carry the system. Before moving the system, check the storage place for the system and remove obstacles in advance. While moving system, boards and other devices should not be shocked physically and damaged caused by dust, moisture, and static electricity. When installing the items imported, system must be installed in a location whose access is not easy from outside. 2.3.2 Unpacking Items The procedure to unpack items is as follows:
The packing items must be packed until they reach the installation place. The items are classified in accordance with each job specification and stored on a place that does not interfere with working. Unpacked systems must be installed immediately. If not installed immediately, the systems must be stored in the installation place temporarily. Unpack the inner packaging after each system is placed on its installation location. Do not recycle packaging waste. Dispose of it in accordance with waste management act. 2-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 2.4 Fixing System 2.4.1 Fixing Unit Mounting Bracket The procedure for fixing the unit mounting bracket is as follows:
Table 2.3 Unit Mounting Bracket Fixing Parts And Tool Classification Description Parts Unit Mounting Unit Mounting Bracket_Top 1 EA/1 Set Bracket Assy (1 Set) Unit Mounting Bracket_Bottom 1 EA/1 Set Bakelite_Top1 Bakelite_Top2 Bakelite_Bottom 1 EA/1 Set 1 EA/1 Set 1 EA/1 Set Fastener
- M8 Plane Washer 6 EA/1 Set
- M8 Spring Washer 6 EA/1 Set
- M8 25L Hex. Bolt 6 EA/1 Set
- Insulation Bushing 6 EA/1 Set Recommended M8 25L Hex. Bolt 5.96~8.94 lbf.ft (82.4~123.6 kgf.cm) Torque Value Working Tools Torque W rench and Level Checking Top/Bottom When Fixing Unit Mount Bracket To install the system accurately, fix the unit mounting brackets by distinguishing its top and bottom as shown below. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-7 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System 1) Place the bakelite-top 1, 2 and unit mounting bracket_top to the RRH-B4's top fixing holes and fix these firmly with fasteners. 2) Place the bakelite-bottom and unit mounting bracket_bottom to the RRH-B4's bottom fixing holes and fix these firmly with fasteners. Bakelite_Top 1 Bakelite_Top 2 Unit Mounting Bracket_Top M8 Insulation Bushing M8 Plane Washer M8 Spring Washer M8 25L Hex. Bolt Bakelite-Bottom Unit Mounting Bracket_Bottom M8 Insulation Bushing M8 Plane Washer M8 Spring Washer M8 25L Hex. Bolt 3.13 in.
(79.5 mm) 2.24 in.
(57 mm) Left Right
[Unit Mounting Bracket_Bottom]
Figure 2.5 Fixing Unit Mounting Bracket 2-8 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 2.4.2 Fixing RRH-B4 RRH-B4 can be fixed to the wall or pole. Fixing RRH-B4 (Wall Type) The procedure for fixing the RRH-B4 to the wall is as follows:
Table 2.4 RRH-B4 Fixing Parts and Tools (Wall Type) Classification Description Parts Fastener M10 Anchor Bolt Assy 4 Set
- M10 Anchor Bolt 1 EA/Set
- M10 Plane Washer 1 EA/Set
- M10 Spring Washer 1 EA/Set
- M10 Hex. Nut 1 EA/Set Recommended Torque Value M10 Hex. Nut 12.03~18.05 lbf.ft
(166.4~249.6 kgf.cm) Working Tools Drill, Hammer, Torque W rench and Level Cautions When Using Wall Mount Fasteners The fasteners such as anchor bolt, spring washer, plane washer and hex. nut used to fix the system to a wall must be made of stainless steel (STS 304). Otherwise, it may cause corrosion and rust to fasteners. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-9 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System Fix unit mounting bracket_top and unit mounting bracket_bottom (attached to the RRH-B4) to the wall with fasteners. M10 Anchor Bolt Unit Mounting Bracket_Top M10 Plane Washer M10 Spring Washer M10 Hex. Nut RRH-B4 Unit Mounting Bracket_Top Unit Mounting Bracket_Bottom Figure 2.6 Fixing RRH-B4 (Wall Type) 2-10 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Fixing RRH-B4 (Pole Type) The procedure for fixing the RRH-B4 to the pole is as follows:
Table 2.5 RRH-B4 Fixing Parts and Tools (Pole Type) Classification Parts Rear Bracket Description 2 EA Fastener
- M12 Hex. Bolt 4 EA/set
- M12 Plane Washer 4 EA/set
- M12 Spring Washer 4 EA/set
- M12 Hex. Nut 4 EA/set Recommended M12 Hex. Nut 21.11~31.67 lbf.ft (292.0~438.0 kgf.cm) Torque Value Working Tools Torque W rench Cautions When Using Pole Fasteners The fasteners such as hex. bolt, hex. nut, spring washer, and plane washer used to fix the system to a pole must be made of stainless steel (STS 304). Otherwise, it may cause corrosion and rust to fasteners. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-11 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System Place the RRH-B4 (attaching unit mounting bracket_top, bottom) to the pole front, place the rear bracket to the pole rear, and fix these firmly with fasteners. Pole
[ 3~4.5 in. ( 76.3~114.3 mm)]
Unit Mounting Bracket_Top M12 180L Hex. Bolt Rear Bracket M12 Plane Washer M12 Spring Washer M12 Hex. Nut Unit Mounting Bracket_Bottom Rear Bracket Left 5.69 in.
(144.5 mm) 4.8 in.
(122 mm) Right Rear Bracket Figure 2.7 Fixing RRH-B4 (Pole Type) 2-12 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual How to lift up RRH-B4 When lifting up the RRH-B4 for installation, after fixing the unit mounting bracket of RRH-B4 side, bind the rope to the heat sink of RRH-B4 and a space between unit mounting bracket_top and RRH-B4, lift up using a hoist lift as shown below. For the safety, maintain the status of lifting up by completing RRH-B4 installation. Unbind the rope after the installation is complete. Hoist Line Rope RRH-B4 Unit Mounting Bracket_Top SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-13 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System 2.5 System Leveling Leveling refers to compensating for the level difference on the floor that is generated during floor work to install devices horizontally or vertically. Leveling can be carried out using a vinyl hose, a balance weight, or a level. In this manual, a commonly used method, which uses a spirit level, is described. Leveling Using a Level Leveling method using a level is as follows:
Table 2.6 Leveling Using a Level Classification Description Test method The level is measured based on the position of a bubble after attaching the spirit level to the top and side of the system. Evaluation criteria Good Poor If it is leveled, the bubble of the spirit level is positioned at the center of both lines. Corrective Use an aid such as bakelite on the back side of the system or an auxiliary measures for poor fixture to adjust the height. leveling Adjust the position of fasteners used to fix the system or its leveling status.
[Measuring Horizontal Position]
[Measuring Vertical Position]
Figure 2.8 Leveling Using a Level (Example) 2-14 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 2.6 Insulation Test Insulation test procedure is as follows:
Table 2.7 Insulation Test Classification Description Test method The insulation tester (Megger) is used for measurement. Position of lead Wall Type Lead line_A Bracket fixing anchor bolt line of insulation tester Lead line_B Systems screw Pole Type Lead line_A Bracket fixing Hex. Bolt. Lead line_B Systems screw Good Poor 500 V/100 M or more Less than 500 V/100 M Evaluation criteria Corrective
- Check the contact between the system and anchor bolt and re-assemble it. measures for
(But, the anchor bolt must be shielded using an insulator such as an insulation poor leveling bushing, etc.)
- Check damage of an insulator such as an insulation busing or bakelite, etc. and replace it. Cautions When Using Insulation Tester Pay attention to the followings to prevent any personal injury caused by an electric shock when using an insulation tester.
- Make sure the polarity is correct when connecting the Earth COM (black) and AC.V (red) lead lines. And do not touch the connected probes inspecting part of the lead line) with a hand and avoid body contact.
- Avoid body contact to the system when measuring an insulation resistance. Probe
(Inspecting part of the lead line) Precautions While Measuring Insulation Resistance Observe the followings to prevent any system damage when measuring insulation resistance because there is a very high voltage.
- Before measuring insulation resistance, disconnect all the cables connected to the system.
- Do not measure insulation resistance when power is on.
- Do not measure insulation resistance at any other positions such as system internal units or parts other than the targeted insulation resistance measuring points. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-15 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 2. Installing System
[Megger]
[Bracket Fixing Anchor Bolt]
[Systems screw]
Figure 2.9 Schematic Diagram for Insulation Test (Wall Type)
[Megger]
[Bracket Fixing Hex.Bolt]
[Systems screw]
Figure 2.10 Schematic Diagram for Insulation Test (Pole Type) 2-16 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 3.1 Work Flow for Cabling The cable workflow for the system is as follows:
Grounding Power Cabling External Interface Cabling CPRI Cable Connection RET/RF Cable Connection Figure 3.1 Work Flow for System Cabling SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-1 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables The detailed procedure of cabling is as follows:
Cable Path Inspection Cable Cutting Cable Installation Cable Binding Connector Attachment When assembling the connector at the site Connector Assembly Identification Tag Attachment Figure 3.2 Detailed Cabling Procedure Considerations when Cutting the Cable after Installation When cutting the cable after installation, make sure that the connector is disconnected. Installation of the cable with the connector connected to the system may cause contact failure or damage to the connector assembled to the system and the cable due to cable tension or the operators mistakes. Cabling Workflow The sequence of cable cutting and installation of the cable workflow can be changed depending on the field situation such as cutting after installing or installing after cutting. Cable Path Inspection When installing a cable that connects between the rectifier, Main Ground Bar (MGB), and backhaul device, etc. within the system, the cable path length and the cable installation method, etc. must be inspected. Follow these guidelines when inspecting the cabling path. A minimum cable length must be selected provided that it does not affect the cable installation and maintenance. The cable must be placed in a location where it will not be damaged by external factors. (power line, flooding, footpaths, etc.) In areas where the cable may be damaged by external factors, ensure that measures are taken to prevent damage to the cable. (cable tray, ducts, flexible pipe, etc.) 3-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Cable Cutting Measure the exact distance, carefully checking the route, and cut the cable using a cutting tool. Follow these guidelines when cutting the cable. Cut the cable to the length determined in the Cable Path Inspection step. Use a dedicated cable cutting tool. Cut the cable at right angles. Be careful to keep the cable away from any moisture, iron, lead, dust or other foreign material when cutting. Remove any foreign material attached to the cable using solvent and a brush. Cable Installation Cable installation involves running the cable along the cabling path to the target connector of the system or an auxiliary device after cable path inspection and cable cutting have been completed. Follow these guidelines when installing a cable. Be careful not to damage the cable. If the cable is damaged, cut out the damaged section before installing. When installing the cable over other cables, make sure the cable is installed on the other cables. Pay more attention to the vertical and horizontal cross sections where the cables are usually reversed. Always use the maximum curvature radius possible, and make sure that the minimum curvature radius specification is complied with. If the cable needs to be protected, use a PVC channel, spiral sleeve, flexible pipe, and cable tray, etc. Table 3.1 Recommended Minimum Allowed Cable Bend Radius No Type Allowed Cable Bend Radius Remark 1 F-GV/F-CV/F-FR-8 8 times of the cable external diameter 0.6/1 KV Cable 2 Optic Cable 20 times of the cable external diameter
-
3 UTP/FTP/S-FTP Cable 4 times of the cable external diameter PVC/LSZH, 4 Pair 4 5 6 7 8 9 1/2 in. Feeder Line (Indoor) 1/2 in. Feeder Line (Outdoor) 7/8 in. Feeder Line (Outdoor) 1.26 in. (32 mm) 4.92 in. (125 mm) 9.84 in. (250 mm) 1-1/4 in. Feeder Line (Outdoor) 14.96 in. (380 mm) 1-5/8 in. Feeder Line (Outdoor) 19.69 in. (500 mm) LMR-400 1 in. (25.4 mm) 4 in. (101.6 mm) RFS, LS RFS, LS RFS, LS RFS, LS RFS, LS Installation Repeated 10 RG-316D 0.59 in. (15 mm)
-
If the allowed cable bend radius is specified by the manufacturer, comply with the bend radius specified. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-3 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Cable Binding Cable binding involves fixing and arranging an installed cable using binding thread, cable ties, binding wire, and ram clamps, etc. Follow these guidelines when binding a cable. Be careful not to damage the cable during binding. Use appropriate cable binding tools according to the target location (indoor or outdoor, etc.) and the use of the cable (power supply cable, optical cable, feeder line, etc.). Do not let the cutting section of a cable tie and binding line, etc. be exposed to the outside. This may cause damage to cables or personal injury. Make sure that the cutting sections of cables are not exposed to the outside. Trim the cable binding cord at about 5 cm (1.97 in.) distance from its knob and insert it into the knot so that the knot does not loosen. If there is a danger that contact failure may occur in a connector connection due to tension, install the cable as short as possible. Assembling and Connecting Connectors Connector connection involves assembling a connector to an installed cable and connecting the assembled connector to a device. Follow these guidelines when assembling and connecting connectors. Make sure you are fully aware of the connector assembly method before assembling a connector. Assemble the connector in accordance with its pin map. Each connector has a hook to prevent its core positions from being changed. Check the corresponding grooves before connecting a connector to another connector. Use a heat shrink tube at a connector connection for cables that are installed outdoor, such as feeder lines, to prevent water leakage and corrosion from occurring at the part exposed to the outside. Connect each cable of the connector assembly in a straight line. Be careful when connecting a cable so that contact failure does not occur at a connector connection due to tension. Identification Tag Attachment Identification tag attachment involves attaching a marker cable tie, nameplate, and label, etc. to the both ends of a cable (connections to a connector) to identify its use and cabling path. Marker Cable Tie On the marker cable tie, a label can be attached. The appearance and specification may differ depending on the type and manufacturer. 3-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Follow these guidelines when attaching an identification tag. When installing a cable outdoor, use relief engraving and coated labels, etc. to prevent the markings from being erased. Since the form and attachment method for identification tags are different for each provider, consult with the provider before attaching them. Connecting Ground Cable When connecting the cables, always connect the ground cable first. If worker contacts the equipment, connect a cable or perform maintenance without connecting the ground cable, the system can be damaged or a worker may be injured due to static electricity and short circuit. Management of Unused Ports Cover the unused ports (conduit, cable gland, etc.) with waterproof cap (sealing cap) to prevent infiltration of foreign material such as dust, moisture, or bug. Cable Installation Checklist When installing, take care not to overlap or tangle the cables; also, consider future expansion. Install the DC power cable and data transmission cable away from the AC power cable to prevent electromagnetic induction. Cable Works The cable works require the knowledge for the cabling works such as cable install ation/tying. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-5 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 3.2 Cabling The cabling diagram of the RRH-B4 is as follows:
[Rectifier]
[Smart MBS UADU]
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU]
[RF Antenna]
5) CPRI Cable 6) RET Cable 7) RF Cable l e b a C d n u o r G e n L i r e d e e F l e b a C r e w o P
) 4 l e b a C d n u o r G 4 B H R R
-
) 3
[MGB]
) e n L i r e d e e F
. n i 8
/
7
/
t i K d n u o r G g n s U n e h W i
(
1) MGB Ground Cable
[TGB]
2) TGB Ground Cable TGB and Ground Kit are used when using the 7/8 in. feeder line or more. Figure 3.3 Cabling Diagram 3-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Table 3.2 RRH-B4 Connection Cable From To Cable Underground MGB (Main Ground Bar) 1) MGB Ground Cable ground
: AWG4/0, F-GV 95 mm2 1C
(However, this can be changed depending on the standards of each provider.) TGB (Tower Ground Bar) 2) TGB Ground Cable
: AWG2, F-GV 35 mm2 1C
(However, this can be changed depending on the standards of each provider.) RRH-B4 MGB 3) RRH-B4 Ground Cable
: AWG8, F-GV 6 mm2 1C Rectifier 4) Power Cable
: AWG10, F-CV 4 mm2 2C
(or AW G8, F-CV 6 mm2 2C) Smart MBS UADU 5) CPRI Cable U-RAS Flexible V2 DU
: Optic Cable (Single Mode) RF Antenna 6) RET Cable Assy (Using Shield Cable) 7) RF Cable
: 1/2 in. or 7/8 in. Feeder Line SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-7 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 3.3 Grounding Grounding is required for protecting complex electronic or electric systems such as power system, communication system, and control system from lightning, over-current, over-
voltage, and electric noise. Thus, the systems can operate properly and protect human life from electrical shock. Ground equipment minimizes the electrical potential of the electronic device to that of the ground, which is zero electrical potential, so that it can prevent the device from occurring electrification. The purposes of the ground construction are as follows:
To prevent human life and the system from over-current, over-voltage, and lightning To provide a discharge path for surge voltage generated by lightning and power switch To protect the system from static electricity To eliminate or minimize the high-frequency potential in the system housing To provide a conductor for the balance and stability of high-frequency current To stabilize the potential of the circuit against the ground Connecting Ground Cable In cabling, the connection of cables without the connection to the ground cable may cause the damage of the equipment or the bodily injury of the worker. Connect the ground cable first. System Grounding Method Ground bar for lightning protector/power/communication must be isolated from each other. These three ground bars can be grounded as the isolation grounding method, or branched from ground mesh buried in the underground as common grounding method. Ground Bar for Power Ground Bar for Power Ground Bar for Communication Ground Bar for Lightning Protector Ground Bar for Communication Ground Bar for Lightning Protector Underground Underground
[Isolation Grounding]
[Common Grounding]
3-8 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 3.3.1 Grounding the System The way to connect the ground cable of RRH-B4 is as follows:
Table 3.3 Grounding the RRH-B4 (MGB~RRH-B4) Classification Description Installation Section MGB~RRH-B4 Grounding Terminal Cable AW G8, F-GV 6 mm2 1C Heat Shrink Tube 0.39 in. (10 mm)/Green/1.96 in. (50 mm)
(Spec/Color/Length) Pressure Terminal MGB Checking MGB specifications per site and preparing fasteners RRH-B4 AW G8 (6 mm2), 2 Hole, Hole Dia.: 1/4 in. (6.35 mm), Hole Space: 0.63 in. (16 mm) Fastener MGB Checking MGB specifications per site and preparing fasteners RRH-B4 M6 10L SEMS/2 EA Recommended M6 SEMS 5.96~8.94 lbf.ft (82.4~123.6 kgf.cm) Torque Value Working Tools Cable Cutter, Wire Stripper, Compressor, Heating Gun, Torque Driver (+), Torque W rench, Nipper Pressure Terminal for Grounding As for the pressure terminal or the cable, the UL certified products or equivalent should be used. Ex) Manufacturer: Panduit RRH-B4: AWG8 (6 mm2) Pressure Terminal (LCD8-14AF-L) Assembling a Pressure Terminal and a Heat Shrink Tube Refer to the ANNEX F to see how to assemble a pressure terminal and a heat shrink tube to a cable. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-9 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 1) Install the ground cable from the MGB to the RRH-B4 ground terminal. 2) Assemble a pressure terminal and a heat shrink tube at the end of the RRH-B4 ground cable. 3) Align the pressure terminal assembled to a ground cable to the mounting hole of the RRH -B4 ground terminal. 4) Firmly fix the pressure terminal onto the RRH-B4 ground terminal using fasteners. RRH-B4 A Ground Cable(AWG8, F-GV 6 mm2 1C) Detail A AWG8 (6 mm2) Pressure Terminal
(2 Hole, 90, hole dia.: 1/4 in., hole space: 0.63 in.) Heat Shrink Tube (Green) M6 10L SEMS Power Cable Bracket Ground Cable (AWG8, F-GV 6 mm2 1C) From MGB (Main Ground Bar) Figure 3.4 Connection of the RRH-B4 Ground Cable 3-10 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 3.4 Power Cabling The power supply device consists of the followings, including an AC distributor and rectifier. Commercial Power AC Distributor AC Rectifier DC System Battery Figure 3.5 Power Equipment Diagram Turning Off the Circuit Breaker before Connecting the Power Cable Since power is applied to the system where the power cable is connected by manipulating the circuit breaker of the rectifier, be sure to check the rectifiers breaker is turned off (open) before connecting the power cable to the power connector. If the system is installed while the circuit breaker is on, the worker may be critically injured as soon as the cable is connected in the wrong way. When Using Power Cables
- W hen handling the power cable, ensure the power switch of a rectifier is turned off to prevent the risk from the power cable and electric short-circuit of related cables.
- Because a power accident may occur when fixing parts get loosened, make sure that fasteners to fix the power cable should be firmly fastened. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-11 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 3.4.1 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable 3.4.1.1 When Using the Power Cable (AWG8) Follow the steps below to connect the RRH-B4 power cable when using power cable
(AWG8). Table 3.4 Connecting the DC Power Cable (AWG8, DC Distributor~RRH-B4) Classification Description Installation Section DC Distributor~RRH-B4 power input terminal Cable Heat Shrink Tube
(Spec/Color/Length)
-48 V RTN
-48 V RTN AW G8, F-CV, 6 mm2 2C Black Red 0.3 in. (8 mm)/Blue/1.18 in. (30 mm) 0.3 in. (8 mm)/Red/1.18 in. (30 mm) Pressure Terminal DC Distributor Check the specification of DC distributor output terminal and prepare fasteners. RRH-B4 AW G8 (6 mm2), Ring Type, Hole Dia.: 0.2 in. (5.3 mm) Fastener DC Distributor Check the specification of DC distributor output terminal and prepare fasteners. RRH-B4 DC Power Input Terminal M5 SEMS/2 EA Recommended Cable Gland 1.81 lbf.ft (25.0 kgf.cm) Torque Value (kgf.cm) M5 SEMS 1.45~2.17 lbf.ft (20.0~30.0 kgf.cm) Torx Screw 0.87 lbf.ft (12.0 kgf.cm) Working Tools Cable Cutter, Wire Stripper, Compressor, Heating Gun, Torque Driver (+), Torque W rench, Nipper, Torx Driver Pressure Terminal for Power As for the pressure terminal or the cable, the UL certified products or equivalent should be used. Ex) Manufacturer-Spec-Kon RRH-B4: AWG8, Pressure Terminal (K8-10R-D) 3-12 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Circuit Breaker Installation To supply stable power to the system, a circuit breaker must be installed to a power supplier. The capacity of -48 VDC circuit breaker is 32 A. Assembling a Pressure Terminal and a Heat Shrink Tube Refer to the ANNEX F to see how to assemble a pressure terminal and a heat shrink tube to a cable. Tools to Tighten Stainless Steel Tie It is recommended to use the following tools or their equivalents to tighten the stainless steel tie that is used to fix an external power cable support bracket and a power cable. Ex) Manufacture-Dong A bestech Part No: DAS 250 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-13 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Disassembling the Cover of RRH-B4 Power Window Open the power window at the rear bottom of RRH-B4 by loosening the Torx screws for fixing cover with a Torx driver (T20). Power Window Cover Cover Fixing Torx Screw(T20) Figure 3.6 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (1) 3-14 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable 1) Install power cable up to the power port of RRH-B4, referring to the Cautions When Installing Power Cable. 2) Cut the power cable installed to the power port, strip the cable sheath, and strip the core wire. 3) Insert a heat shrink tube to each core, and install the compression terminal and compressing it. 4) Place the heat shrink tube on the pressure terminal assembly (-48 V: blue, RTN: red), and shrink it using a heating gun. DC Power Cable
(AWG8) 0.58~0.6 in.
(14.7~15.4mm) 1.77 in. (45 mm) 0.39 in.(10 mm) 1.38 in. (35 mm) DC Power Cable
(AWG8) RTN
-48 V DC Power Cable
(AWG8) 0.59 in.
(15 mm) Figure 3.7 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-15 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Precautions When Connecting Power Cable To secure rainproof performance of a cable gland, min. 11.81 in. (300 mm) straight section must be maintained. Here, the radius of curvature must be considered according to the cable specification. Stainless Steel Band or Cable Tie 11.81 in. (300 mm) or more 11.81 in. (300 mm) 11.81 in. (300 mm) Precautions When Cutting Power Cable Install the power cable to the power port of system by considering the radius of curvature of its cable specification and then cut the cable. If you install the cable after cutting, there may be length difference among the core wires at the end of the cable because of cable curvature. This may result in poor contact after the cable is connected to the power port. 3-16 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 5) Remove the protection cap of power terminal. RTN
-48 V M5 SEMS Protection Cap of Power Terminal Figure 3.8 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (3) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-17 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 6) Remove the rain-proof filler and the cable gland nut from the cable gland for power cable input at the bottom of RRH-B4. 7) Insert the rain-proof filler and the cable gland nut removed from the 1 power cable (AWG8, F-CV 6 mm2 2C). 8) Pass the power cable though the cable gland at the bottom of the RRH -B4, and install it inside the power window.
-48 V RTN Power Cable Bracket Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Pressure Terminal Heat Shrink Tube
(-48 V: Blue, RTN: Red) Cable Gland Body Power Cable Power Cable Bracket Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Figure 3.9 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (4) 3-18 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 9) Place the pressure terminal installed to the power cable according to the polarity of the power terminal block, and fix it with fasteners. RTN
-48 V Pressure Terminal M5 SEMS Heat Shrink Tube
(-48 V: Blue, RTN: Red) Protection Cap of Power Terminal Power Cable
(-48 V: Black, RTN: Red) Figure 3.10 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (5) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-19 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 10) Fully insert the rain-proof filler to the cable gland body, and tighten the cable gland nut using a torque wrench with torque value 2.17 lbf.ft (30 kgf.cm).
-48 V RTN Rain-proof Gasket Protection Cap of Power Terminal Power Cable Bracket Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Protrusion of Rain-Proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Power Cable Outer Jacket
(AWG8) Figure 3.11 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (6) Caution for Rain-proof Gasket Damage Be careful the rain-proof gasket is not damaged during work, and check again the gasket is not damaged before closing power/DTA window cover. If the rain-proof gasket is damaged, replace the RRH-B4. 3-20 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 11) Close the power window, and tighten the Torx screws with a torque driver (T20) with torque value 0.87 lbf.ft (12 kgf.cm). Tightening order is
. 12) Fix the RRH-B4 power cable and the power cable bracket using a stainless steel tie. Torque Driver Power Window Cover Cover Fixing Torx Screw (T20) Stainless Steel Tie Power Cable Bracket Power Cable
(AWG 8, F-CV 6 mm2 2C) Figure 3.12 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG8 (7) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-21 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Check When Fixing the Power Cable Fix the power cable and the power cable bracket using a stainless steel tie for preventing loose contact due to cable tension and leakage problems. It is recommended to use the designated tools to tighten the stainless steel tie. 3.4.1.2 When Using the Power Cable (AWG10) Follow the steps below to connect the RRH-B4 power cable when using power cable
(AWG10). Table 3.5 Connecting the DC Power Cable (AWG10, DC Distributor~RRH-B4) Classification Description Installation Section DC Distributor~RRH-B4 power input terminal Cable
-48 V RTN AW G10, F-CV 4 mm2 2C Black Red Heat Shrink Tube
-48 V 0.3 in. (8 mm)/Blue/1.18 in. (30 mm)
(Spec/Color/Length) RTN 0.3 in. (8 mm)/Red/1.18 in. (30 mm) Pressure Terminal DC Distributor Check the specification of DC distributor output terminal and prepare fasteners. RRH-B4 AW G10 (4 mm2), Ring Type, Hole Dia.: 0.2 in. (5.3 mm) Fastener DC Distributor Check the specification of DC distributor output terminal and prepare fasteners. RRH-B4 DC Power Input Terminal M5 SEMS/2 EA Recommended Cable Gland 1.74 lbf.ft (25.0 kgf.cm) Torque Value (kgf.cm) M5 SEMS 1.45~2.17 lbf.ft (20.0~30.0 kgf.cm) Torx Screw 0.83 lbf.ft (12.0 kgf.cm) Working Tools Cable Cutter, Wire Stripper, Compressor, Heating Gun, Torque Driver
(+, T20), Torque W rench, Nipper, Driver (+, T20) 3-22 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Pressure Terminal for Power As for the pressure terminal or the cable, the UL certified products or equivalent should be used. Ex) Manufacturer-Donga bestech RRH-B4: AWG10 (4 mm2) Pressure Terminal (PTSR0306) Circuit Breaker Installation To supply stable power to the system, a circuit breaker must be installed to a power supplier. The capacity of -48 VDC circuit breaker is 32 A. Assembling a Pressure Terminal and a Heat Shrink Tube Refer to the ANNEX F to see how to assemble a pressure terminal and a heat shrink tube to a cable. Tools to Tighten Stainless Steel Tie It is recommended to use the following tools or their equivalents to tighten the stainless steel tie that is used to fix an external power cable support bracket and a power cable. Ex) Manufacture-Dong A bestech Part No: DAS 250 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-23 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Disassembling the Cover of RRH-B4 Power Window Open the power window on the rear bottom of the RRH-B4 by loosening the cover fixing Torx screws with a Torx driver (T20). Power Window Cover Cover Fixing Torx Screw (T20) Figure 3.13 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (1) 3-24 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable 1) Install power cable up to the power port of RRH-B4, referring to the Cautions When Installing Power Cable. 2) Cut the power cable installed to the power port, strip the cable sheath, and strip the core wire. 3) Insert a heat shrink tube to each core, and install the compression terminal and compressing it. 4) Place the heat shrink tube on the pressure terminal assembly (-48 V: blue, RTN: red), and shrink it using a heating gun. 5) Insert a heat shrink tube(jelly type, black) to the part, which the external sheath is removed, and shrink it using a heating gun. DC Power Cable
(AWG10) 0.45~0.49 in.
(11.5~12.4 mm) 1.38 in. (35 mm) 0.39 in. (10 mm) 0.98 in. (25 mm) RTN
-48 V 0.59 in.
(15 mm) DC Power Cable
(AWG10) DC Power Cable
(AWG10) Heat Shrink Tube
(Jelly Type, 12/4, Black) 0.98 in. (25 mm) Figure 3.14 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-25 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Precautions When Connecting Power Cable To secure rainproof performance of a cable gland, min. 11.81 in. (300 mm) straight section must be maintained. Here, the radius of curvature must be considered according to the cable specification. Stainless Steel Band or Cable Tie 11.81 in. (300 mm) or more 11.81 in. (300 mm) 11.81 in. (300 mm) Precautions When Cutting Power Cable Install the power cable to the power port of system by considering the radius of curvature of its cable specification and then cut the cable. If you install the cable after cutting, there may be length difference among the core wires at the end of the cable because of cable curvature. This may result in poor contact after the cable is connected to the power port. 6) Remove the protection cap of power terminal. RTN
-48 V M5 SEMS Protection Cap of Power Teminal Figure 3.15 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (3) 3-26 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 7) Remove the rain-proof filler and the cable gland nut from the cable gland for power cable input at the bottom of RRH-B4. 8) Insert the rain-proof filler and the cable gland nut removed from the 1 power cable (AWG10, F-CV 4 mm2 2C). 9) Pass the power cable though the cable gland at the bottom of the RRH -B4, and install it inside the power window.
-48 V RTN Power Cable Bracket Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Pressure Terminal Heat Shrink Tube
(-48 V: Blue, RTN:Red) Cable Gland Body Power Cable Power Cable Bracket Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Figure 3.16 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (4) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-27 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 10) Place the pressure terminal installed to the power cable according to the polarity of the power terminal block, and fix it with fasteners. RTN
-48 V Pressure Terminal M5 SEMS Heat Shrink Tube
(-48 V: Blue, RTN: Red) Protection Cap of Power Terminal Power Cable
(-48 V: Black, RTN: Red) Figure 3.17 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (5) 3-28 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 11) Fully insert the rain-proof filler to the cable gland body, and tighten the cable gland nut using a torque wrench with torque value 2.17 lbf.ft (30 kgf.cm).
-48 V RTN Rain-proof Gasket Protection Cap of Power Terminal Power Cable Bracket Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Protrusion of Rain-Proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Heat Shrink Tube
(Jelly type, 12/4) 0.39 in. (10 mm) DC Power Cable Outer Jacket
(AWG10, F-CV 4 mm2 2C, 0.45~0.49 in./ 11.5~12.4 mm) Figure 3.18 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (6) Caution for Rain-proof Gasket Damage Be careful the rain-proof gasket is not damaged during work, and check again the gasket is not damaged before closing power/DTA window cover. If the rain-proof gasket is damaged, replace the RRH-B4. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-29 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 12) Close the power window, and tighten the Torx screws with a torque driver (T20) with torque value 0.87 lbf.ft (12 kgf.cm). Tightening order is
. 13) Fix the RRH-B4 power cable and the power cable bracket using a stainless steel tie. Torque Driver Power Window Cover Cover Fixing Torx Screw (T20) Stainless Steel Tie Power Cable Bracket Power Cable
(AWG 10, F-CV 4 mm2 2C) Figure 3.19 Connecting the RRH-B4 Power Cable_AWG10 (7) 3-30 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Check When Fixing the Power Cable Fix the power cable and the power cable bracket using a stainless steel tie for preventing loose contact due to cable tension and leakage problems. It is recommended to use the designated tools to tighten the stainless steel tie. 3.4.2 Power Test Perform the power test of the system for the following areas. Power cable connection stability check Check the power cable connection for the power source such as a rectifier and verify if the power cable is securely tightened into the RRH-B4 input terminal. Supply voltage of the power source Use a digital voltage meter to check if the power supplied is within the allowed input voltage range of the RRH-B4. (Rated input voltage: -48 V, Allowed input voltage:
-40~-56 V) Power on/off test Turn the power switch on/off to check if the system operates normally. Power Window Cover Be sure to check the circuit breaker for RRH-B4 is turned off before opening or closing the power window cover. If the cover is open or close while the circuit breaker is on, the system can be damaged or a worker may be critically injured due to electrical short-circuit. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-31 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 3.5 External Interface Construction 3.5.1 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection Consider the following cases when connecting the CPRI cable (RRH-4 interface). For U-RAS Flexible V2: WiMAX+TD-LTE Multi-Mode (Case #1~Case #3) For Smart MBS: TD-LTE (Case #1 and Case #2) For stacking between U-RAS Flexible V2 (WiMAX) and Smart MBS
(Case #1~Case #3) Warning for Laser Beam Running through Optical Cables In the system, the laser beam emitting light runs through the optical cable. The exposure of the laser beam on workers eye may cause serious injury so that it should be handled with care. Connecting the Optic Cable Before connecting the optical cable, check if the cutting section of the connector core is soiled. Be careful to keep the cutting section away from dust or foreign material. If the cable is soiled with foreign material, do not blow to remove them. Make sure to clean the connector in accordance with the cleaning directions for the optic cable. Refer the ANNEX D. Table 3.6 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection Classification Description Installation Section DU (UADU)~RRH-B4 Cable Optic Cable (Single Mode, for Outdoor) Connector DU RRH-B4 LC/PC LC/PC Working Tools Nipper, Optic Connector Cleaner, Torque Driver (T20), Torx Driver (T20) Blue Orange Green Brown Slate (Gray) White Red Black Figure 3.20 Specifications of CPRI Cable and Connector 3-32 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Follow the steps below to connect the interface (CPRI) cable. Disassembling the Cover of RRH-B4 DTA Window 1) Open the DTA window on the bottom left of the RRH -B4 by loosening the cover fixing screws with a Torx driver (T20). DTA Window Cover Cover Fixing Screw (T20) Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) Figure 3.21 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-33 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 2) Remove the cable gland nut and the rain-proof filler from the optic cable gland (M25) at the left bottom of RRH-B4. 3) Insert the cable gland nut cable and then the rain-proof filler to the RRH-B4 interface (CPRI) cable. Place the rain-proof filler top-end on the end of heat shrink tube. Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Heat Shrink Tube End of Heat Shrink Tube RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable End of Heat Shrink Tube Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut RRH-B4 Interface
(CPRI) Cable Figure 3.22 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (2) 3-34 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 4) Insert the RRH-B4 interface (CPRI) cable from the bottom of the RRH-B4 through the optic cable gland and install it inside the DTA window. 5) Fully insert the rain-proof filler to the cable gland body, and tighten the cable gland nut using a torque wrench with torque value 2.17 lbf.ft (25 kgf.cm). 6) Connect the RRH-B4 interface (CPRI) optic connector to the SFP module
, in order of figure 3.24. (See the cable color of figure 3.20.) Cable Gland Nut RRH-B4 interface(CPRI) Cable Bending radius: 0.79 in.(20 mm) Group Tube Heat Shrink Tube 0.59 in. (15 mm) 0.79 in. (20 mm) Figure 3.23 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (3) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-35 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Figure 3.24 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (4) 3-36 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 7) Close the DTA window cover, and tighten the screws using a torque driver (T20) with torque value 0.87 lbf.ft (12 kgf.cm). Rain-proof Gasket Torque Driver DTA Window Cover Cover Fixing Screw (T20) Figure 3.25 RRH-B4 Interface (CPRI) Cable Connection (5) Caution for Rain-proof Gasket Damage Be careful the rain-proof gasket is not damaged during work, and check again the gasket is not damaged before closing power/DTA window cover. If the rain-proof gasket is damaged, replace the RRH-B4. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-37 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 3.5.1.1 For U-RAS Flexible V2: WiMAX + TD-LTE Multi-Mode Consider the following cases when connecting the CPRI cable (RRH-4 interface) for WiMAX + TD-LTE multi-mode. Case #1: WiMAX+TD-LTE, 2Tx/2Rx Follow the steps below to connect CPRI cables for 2Tx/2Rx configuration of the U-RAS Flexible V2. Table 3.7 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1) DU Port Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) RRH-B4 MRA-F #0 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #3 MRA-L L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 A0 A1 A2 A3 B0 B1 B2 B3 C0 C1 C2 C3 Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #0
-
Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #1
-
Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #2
-
White (LC5)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
NC NC RRH-B4 #0 or #1 or #2 RRH-B4 #0 Blue (LC0) RRH-B4 #1
-
NC NC Blue (LC0) RRH-B4 #2
-
NC NC 3-38 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual A0 A1 A2 A3 B0 B1 B2 B3 C0 C1 C2 C3 L0 L0 L0 L0 L1 L1 L1 L1 MRA-L MRA-F #3 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #0
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic1 (LTE1) RRH-B4 #0 or #1 or #2 Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #0~#2]
Figure 3.26 CPRI Cable Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-39 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 1) Install the CPRI cable (RRH-B4 interface) from the U-RAS Flexible V2 DU to the optic port on RRH-B4. 2) Connect RRH-B4 side connector of CPRI cable to the optic port.
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #0]
Optic7 (WiM AX3) Optic6 (WiM AX2) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiM AX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiM AX0) Optic3 (LTE3) CPRI Cable A
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #1]
Optic7 (WiM AX3) Optic6 (WiM AX2) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiM AX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiM AX0) Optic3 (LTE3) CPRI Cable A
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #2]
Optic7 (WiM AX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiM AX2) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiM AX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiM AX0) Optic3 (LTE3) CPRI Cable A Figure 3.27 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1 (1) 3-40 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual CPRI Cable Connector (LC/PC) Detail A Optic0 (LTE0) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Figure 3.28 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #1 (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-41 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Case #2: WiMAX 4 Subcells+TD-LTE 1 Carrier/3 Sector, 2Tx/2Rx Follow the steps below to connect CPRI cables for WiMAX 4 subcells + TD-LTE 1 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx configuration of U-RAS Flexible V2. When U-RAS Flexible V2 supports WiMAX/TD-LTE multi-mode, up to 4 WiMAX channel cards (MRA-F) can be mounted on the U-RAS Flexible V2 to support 4 subcells. The operator can set operating sectors and frequencies for each subcell. The following example shows the pin map where an alpha sector has 3 and a beta sector has 1 respectively among 6 WiMAX subcells. Table 3.8 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2) DU Port Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) MRA-F #0 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #3 MRA-L L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 A0 A1 A2 A3 B0 B1 B2 B3 C0 C1 C2 C3 Slate[Gray] (LC4)
-
White (LC5)
-
Red (LC6)
-
RRH-B4 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #0 Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #1
-
Blue (LC0)
-
NC NC RRH-B4 #0 Blue (LC0) RRH-B4 #1
-
NC NC Blue (LC0) RRH-B4 #2
-
NC NC 3-42 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual A0 A1 A2 A3 B0 B1 B2 B3 L0 L0 L0 L0 L1 L1 L1 L1 MRA-L MRA-F #3 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #0
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU]
C1 C2 C3 P o w e r C a b l e B r a c k e t Optic7(WiMAX3) Optic6(WiMAX2) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5(WiMAX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4(WiMAX0) Optic3 (LTE3) Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) C0
[RRH-B4 #0]
[RRH-B4 #1]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #2]
Figure 3.29 CPRI Cable Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-43 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 1) Install the CPRI cable (RRH-B4 interface) from the U-RAS Flexible V2 DU to the optic port on RRH-B4. 2) Connect RRH-B4 side connector of CPRI cable to the optic port.
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #0]
Optic7 (WiM AX3) Optic6 (WiM AX2) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiM AX1) Optic2(LTE2) Optic4 (WiM AX0) Optic3 (LTE3) A
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #1]
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
Optic7 (WiM AX3) Optic6 (WiM AX2) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiM AX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiM AX0) Optic3 (LTE3) B Optic7 (WiM AX3) Optic6 (WiM AX2) Optic5 (WiM AX1) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiM AX0) Optic3 (LTE3) C Figure 3.30 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2 (1) 3-44 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Detail A Detail B CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Optic0 (LTE0) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic4 (WiMAX0) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Detail C Optic0 (LTE0) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Optic0 (LTE0) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Figure 3.31 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #2 (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-45 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Case #3: 2Tx/4Rx or 4Tx/4Rx Follow the steps below to connect CPRI cables for 2Tx/4Rx or 4Tx/4Rx configuration of the U-RAS Flexible V2. Table 3.9 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3) DU Port Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) RRH-B4 MRA-F #0 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #3 MRA-L L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 A0 A1 A2 A3 B0 B1 B2 B3 C0 C1 C2 C3 Slate[Gray] (LC4) Red (LC6) Slate[Gray] (LC4) Red (LC6) Slate[Gray] (LC4) Red (LC6) White (LC5) Black (LC7) Blue (LC0) Green (LC1) NC NC Blue (LC0) Green (LC1) NC NC Blue (LC0) Green (LC1) NC NC RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 RRH-B4 #0 or #1 or #2 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 3-46 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual A0 A1 A2 A3 B0 B1 B2 B3 C0 C1 C2 C3 L0 L0 L0 L0 L1 L1 L1 L1 MRA-L MRA-F #3 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #0
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU]
RRH-B4 #0 or #1 or #2 Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic1 (LTE1) RRH-B4 #0 or #1 or #2 Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #0~#2]
Figure 3.32 CPRI Cable Pin Map (U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-47 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 1) Install the CPRI cable (RRH-B4 interface) from the U-RAS Flexible V2 DU to the optic port on RRH-B4. 2) Connect RRH-B4 side connector of CPRI cable to the optic port.
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #0]
Optic7 (WiM AX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiM AX2) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic 5(WiM AX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiM AX0) Optic3 (LTE3) A
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #1]
Optic7 (WiM AX3) Optic6 (WiM AX2) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiM AX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiM AX0) Optic3 (LTE3) A
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[RRH-B4 #2]
Optic7 (WiM AX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiM AX2) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiM AX1) Optic4 (WiM AX0) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) A Figure 3.33 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3 (1) 3-48 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Detail A Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic2 (LTE2) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Figure 3.34 CPRI Cable Connection_U-RAS Flexible V2, Case #3 (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-49 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 3.5.1.2 For Smart MBS: TD-LTE Consider the following cases when connecting the CPRI cable (RRH-4 interface) for TD-
LTE. Case #1: TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx Follow the steps below to connect CPRI cables for TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx configuration of the Smart MBS. Table 3.10 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #1) UADU Port L9CA #0 L9CA #0 Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 Blue (LC0)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
Orange (LC1)
-
Orange (LC1)
-
Orange (LC1)
-
RRH-B4 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 3-50 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L9CA #1 L9CA #0
[UADU]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #0~#2]
Figure 3.35 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-51 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 1) Install the CPRI cable (RRH-B4 interface) from the Smart MBS UADU to the optic port on RRH-B4. 2) Connect RRH-B4 side connector of CPRI cable to the optic port.
[RRH-B4 #0]
Optic7 (WiM AX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiM AX2) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiM AX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiM AX0) Optic3 (LTE3) l e b a C I A R P C
[UADU]
[RRH-B4 #1]
Optic7 (WiM AX3) Optic6 (WiM AX2) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiM AX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiM AX0) Optic3 (LTE3) l e b a C I A R P C
[UADU]
Figure 3.36 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #1 (1) 3-52 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual
[RRH-B4 #2]
Optic7 (WiM AX3) Optic6 (WiM AX2) Optic5 (WiM AX1) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiM AX0) Optic3 (LTE3) l e b a C I R P C A
[UADU]
Detail A Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Figure 3.37 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #1 (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-53 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Case #2: TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/4Rx or 4Tx/4Rx Follow the steps below to connect CPRI cables for TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/4Rx or 4Tx/4Rx configuration of the Smart MBS. Table 3.11 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #2) RRH-B4 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 L9CA #1 L9CA #0 UADU Port Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) L9CA #0 L9CA #1 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 Blue (LC0) Green (LC2) Blue (LC0) Green (LC2) Blue (LC0) Green (LC2) Orange (LC1) Brown (LC3) Orange (LC1) Brown (LC3) Orange (LC1) Brown (LC3) L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5
[UADU]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #0~2]
Figure 3.38 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Smart MBS, Case #2) 3-54 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 1) Install the CPRI cable (RRH-B4 interface) from the Smart MBS UADU to the optic port on RRH-B4. 2) Connect RRH-B4 side connector of CPRI cable to the optic port.
[RRH-B4 #0]
Optic7 (WiM AX3) Optic6 (WiM AX2) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiM AX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiM AX0) Optic3 (LTE3) A
[UADU]
[RRH-B4 #1]
Optic7 (WiM AX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiM AX2) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiM AX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiM AX0) Optic3 (LTE3) l e b a C I R P C l e b a C I A R P C
[UADU]
Figure 3.39 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #2 (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-55 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables
[RRH-B4 #2]
Optic7 (WiM AX3) Optic6 (WiM AX2) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiM AX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiM AX0) Optic3 (LTE3) l e b a C I A R P C
[UADU]
Detail A CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic1 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Figure 3.40 CPRI Cable Connection_Smart MBS, Case #2 (2) 3-56 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 3.5.1.3 For Stacking between U-RAS Flexible V2 (WiMAX) and Smart MBS Following shows how to connect CPRI cables for stacking between U-RAS Flexible V2
(WiMAX) and Smart MBS (TD-LTE). Case#1: WiMAX 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx+TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx Follow the steps below to connect CPRI cables for WiMAX 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx +
TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx configuration of U-RAS Flexible V2 and Smart MBS. Table 3.12 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Stacking, Case #1) DU (UADU) DU (UADU) Port U-RAS Flexible V2 MRA-F #0 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #3 MRA-F #4 MRA-F #5 Smart MBS L9CA #0 L9CA #1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) RRH-B4 Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #0
-
Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #1
-
Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #2
-
White (LC5) RRH-B4 #0
-
White (LC5) RRH-B4 #1
-
White (LC5)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
RRH-B4 #2 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 Orange (LC1) RRH-B4 #0
-
Orange (LC1) RRH-B4 #1
-
Orange (LC1) RRH-B4 #2
-
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-57 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L9CA #1 L9CA #0
[UADU]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic1 LTE1) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #0~#2]
L0 L0 L0 L0 L0 L0 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 MRA-F #5 MRA-F #4 MRA-F #3 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #0
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU]
Figure 3.41 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Stacking, Case #1) 3-58 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 1) Install CPRI cables (RRH-B4 interface) between:
- RRH-B4 and L0, L2, and L4 ports on UADU L9CA #0 and #1
- RRH-B4 and L0 ports on U-RAS Flexible V2 DU MRA-F #0-#5 2) Connect the UADU- and U-RAS Flexible V2 DU-side connectors to the following ports.
- L0, L2, and L4 ports on UADU L9CA #0 and #1
- L0 ports on U-RAS Flexible V2 DU MRA-F #0-#5 B
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
l e b a C I R P C l e b a C I R P C l e b a C I l e b a C I R P C R P C
[RRH-B4 #0]
[RRH-B4 #1]
[RRH-B4 #2]
CPRI Cable
[UADU Front]
l e b a C I R P C A Figure 3.42 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #1 (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-59 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Detail A Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic1 (LTE1) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Figure 3.43 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #1 (2) 3-60 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Case #2: WiMAX 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/4Rx + TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/4Rx Follow the steps below to connect CPRI cables for WiMAX 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/4Rx +
TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/4Rx configuration of U-RAS Flexible V2 and Smart MBS. Table 3.13 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Stacking, Case #2) DU (UADU) DU (UADU) Port U-RAS Flexible V2 MRA-F #0 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #3 MRA-F #4 MRA-F #5 Smart MBS L9CA #0 L9CA #1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) RRH-B4 Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #0 Red (LC6) Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #1 Red (LC6) Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #2 Red (LC6) White (LC5) Black (LC7) White (LC5) Black (LC7) White (LC5) Black (LC7) Blue (LC0) Green (LC2) Blue (LC0) Green (LC2) Blue (LC0) Green (LC2) Orange (LC1) Brown (LC3) Orange (LC1) Brown (LC3) Orange (LC1) Brown (LC3) RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-61 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L9CA #1 L9CA #0
[UADU]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #0~#2]
L0 L0 L0 L0 L0 L0 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 MRA-F #5 MRA-F #4 MRA-F #3 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #0
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU]
Figure 3.44 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Stacking, Case #2) 3-62 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 1) Install CPRI cables (RRH-B4 interface) between:
- RRH-B4 and L0~L5 ports on UADU L9CA #0 and #1
- RRH-B4 and L0 and L1 ports on U-RAS Flexible V2 DU MRA-F #0-#5 2) Connect the UADU- and U-RAS Flexible V2 DU-side connectors to the following ports.
- L0~L5 ports on UADU L9CA #0 and #1
- L0 and L1 ports on U-RAS Flexible V2 DU MRA-F #0-#5
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
l e b a C I R P C
[RRH-B4 #0]
l e b a C I R P C
[UADU Front]
B A Figure 3.45 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #2 (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-63 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables
[RRH-B4 #1]
[RRH-B4 #2]
B
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
CPRI Cable A
[UADU Front]
CPRI Cable B
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
CPRI Cable A
[UADU Front]
CPRI Cable Figure 3.46 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #2 (2) 3-64 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Detail A CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Figure 3.47 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #2 (3) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-65 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Case #3: WiMAX 6 Subcell 2Tx/2Rx + TD-LTE 2 Carrier/3 Sector 2Tx/2Rx U-RAS Flexible V2 DU interfaces with Smart MBS to support the WiMAX and TD-LTE services simultaneously. Up to 6 WiMAX channel cards (MRA-F) can be mounted on the U-RAS Flexible V2 to support 6 subcells. The operator can set operating sectors and frequencies for each subcell. The following example shows the pin map where an alpha sector has 4 and a beta sector has 2 respectively among 6 WiMAX subcells. Table 3.14 CPRI Cable Connector Pin Map (Stacking, Case #3) DU (UADU) DU (UADU) Port U-RAS Flexible V2 MRA-F #0 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #3 MRA-F #4 MRA-F #5 Smart MBS L9CA #0 L9CA #1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 Optic Cable Color
(Cable Marker) RRH-B4 Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #0
-
White (LC5)
-
Red (LC6)
-
Black (LC7)
-
RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #0 Slate[Gray] (LC4) RRH-B4 #1
-
White (LC5) RRH-B4 #1
-
Blue (LC0)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
Blue (LC0)
-
RRH-B4 #0 RRH-B4 #1 RRH-B4 #2 Orange (LC1) RRH-B4 #0
-
Orange (LC1) RRH-B4 #1
-
Orange (LC1) RRH-B4 #2
-
3-66 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
1 2 3 4 | User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 4.28 MiB | December 20 2012 / June 18 2013 |
2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L9CA #1 L9CA #0
[UADU]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic3 (LTE3) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #0]
[RRH-B4 #1]
Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic1 (LTE1) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic2 (LTE2) Optic3 (LTE3)
[RRH-B4 #2]
L0 L0 L0 L0 L0 L0 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 MRA-F #5 MRA-F #4 MRA-F #3 MRA-F #2 MRA-F #1 MRA-F #0
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU]
Figure 3.48 CPRI Cable Pin Map (Stacking, Case #3) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-67 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 1) Install CPRI cables (RRH-B4 interface) between:
- RRH-B4 and L0, L2, and L4 ports on UADU L9CA #0 and #1
- RRH-B4 and L0 port on U-RAS Flexible V2 DU MRA-F #0-#5 2) Connect the UADU- and U-RAS Flexible V2 DU-side connectors to the following ports.
- L0, L2, and L4 ports on UADU L9CA #0 and #1
- L0 ports on U-RAS Flexible V2 DU MRA-F #0-#5
[RRH-B4 #0]
B
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
CPRI Cable A
[UADU Front]
CPRI Cable B
[U-RAS Flexible V2 DU Front]
CPRI Cable
[RRH-B4 #1]
A A
[UADU Front]
CPRI Cable
[RRH-B4 #2]
[UADU Front]
[UADU Front]
CPRI Cable Figure 3.49 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case #3 (1) 3-68 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Detail A Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic5 (WiMAX1) Optic4 (WiMAX0) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Detail B Detail C CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) CPRI Cable
(RRH-B4 Interface) Optic7 (WiMAX3) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic6 (WiMAX2) Optic1 (LTE1) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Optic0 (LTE0) Optic1 (LTE1) CPRI Cable Connector
(LC/PC) Figure 3.50 CPRI Cable Connection_Stacking, Case# 3 (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-69 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables 3.5.2 RET Cable Connection Follow the steps below to connect the Remote Electrical Tilting (RET) cable to control the antenna tilting angle remotely. Table 3.15 RET Cable Connection Classification Description Installation Section Cable Connector RF Antenna~RRH-B4 RET Cable Assy RS-485 1) Install a RET cable assy from the RF antenna to the RET port of RRH-B4
[RF Antenna]
RET Cable Assy Figure 3.51 RET Cable Connection (1) 3-70 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 2) Connect the RET cable connector to the RET port at the bottom of the RRH-B4 RET Connector (SAMWOO, SU-20SP-8P) RET Cable (Shield Cable) Heat Shrink Tube (Jelly Type) Heat Shrink Tube (Jelly Type) Heat Shrink Tube (Jelly Type) Figure 3.52 RET Cable Connection (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-71 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Figure 3.53 RET Cable Connector Table 3.16 RET Cable Connector Pin Map RET Connector Samwoo, SU-20SP-8P Pin Function 3 4 5 6 7 1, 2, 8 RS485B DGND RS485A
+21 V
+21 V RTN NC RET
- When 21 VDC volts are applied, the current supplied to the RET from RRH-B4 must be 1 A or lower.
- The exterior of the RET connector must be made of metal without vent hole or other UL certified material. 3-72 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 3.5.3 RF Cable Connection Follow the steps below to connect the RF cable. Table 3.17 RF Cable Connection Classification Description Installation Section RRH-B4~RF Antenna Cable RRH-B4~RF Antenna RRH-B4 Connector RF Antenna Mini Din Type-Male Din Type-Male Cable Cutter, Wire Stripper, Nipper, Torque Wrench, Spanner, Knife, Soldering Iron, Lead 1/2 in. Feeder Line Mini Din Type-Male Din Type-Male 1.45 lbf.ft (20 kgf.cm) 14.50 lbf.ft (200 kgf.cm) Recommended Torque Value Working Tools Installing the Antenna When you install the antenna, the antenna must be within the protective angle
(left/right side 45 each from the central axis) to prevent the antenna from lightning damage. Lightning Rod 45 45 RF Antenna SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-73 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables RF Cable Configuration The RF cable is connected in the following two methods. Prepare and install parts based on the method agreed by a service provider or the site conditions. Table 3.18 RF Cable Connection at Antenna Connection Area Case Case #1 Case #2 RF Antenna n o i t c e s R l e b a c t h g a r t i S i s u d a r
. i n M t e r u a v r u c f o RF Antenna n o i t c e s R l e b a c t i h g a r t S i s u d a r
. i n M t e r u a v r u c f o Description Connect a 7/8 in. or longer feeder line directly to the RF antenna.
- If a space for min. radius of curvature can be secured when a 7/8 in. or longer feeder line is used.
- If no excessive force is applied to the connector assembled to the antenna port or cable because the straight cable section is long enough. Connect a 1/2 in. feeder line (jumper cable) to the RF antenna.
- If a space for min. radius of curvature cannot be secured when a 7/8 in. or longer feeder line is used.
- If excessive force is applied to the connector assembled to the antenna port or cable and it may cause poor contact or damage because the straight cable section is not long enough. 7/8 in. or longer feeder line: 7/8 in./1 1/4 in./1 5/8 in. feeder line, etc. The RF cable must be connected based on the method agreed by a provider or the site conditions. 3-74 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual RF Antenna
[RRH-B4]
1/2 in. Feeder Line
(RRH-B4~RF Antenna) Figure 3.54 RF Cable Configuration RF Antenna Connector As different connector types may be used depending on the RF antenna type, check the antenna connector before connecting the cable. RF Cable Identification Tag Installation Attach the identification tape in the below table to the RF cable. Table 3.19 RF Cable Identification Tag Category Installation position Materials Fixing method Description Attach the identification tag to the both ends of the antenna. Use the material of aluminum coated by vinyl for the identification tag.
- Antenna side: Attach the tag to the feeder line using binding strings through the two holes on the tag.
- Equipment Side: Cover up the feeder line with the tag and fix it using binding strings through the two holes on the tag. Identification method The markings must be prevented from being erased by using relief engraving or coated labels. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-75 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables RF Cable Connection Follow the steps below to connect the cable between RRH-B4 and RF antenna. 1) Before connecting the connector to the RF port (Mini Din type-female) at the bottom of RRH-B4, insert a heat shrink tube (jelly type). 2) After connecting the connector, place the heat shrink tube inserted in the previous step at the connecting area and shrink it using a heating gun. Mini Din Type-Female Connector Mini Din Type-Male Connector 1/2 in. Feeder Line
(RRH-B4 RF Port~RF Antenna) Heat Shrink Tube (Jelly Type) 3-76 Figure 3.55 RF Cable Connection (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 3) Insert a heat shrink tube (jelly type) for finishing at the end of the antenna jumper cable (1/2 in. feeder line) with a Din type-male connector installed and then connect to the antenna input port. 4) When the connector is connected completely, insert the heat shrink tube inserted in the previous step up to the connecting area and shrink it using a heating gun. RF Antenna Antenna Connector (Din Type-Female) Din Type-Male Connector for 1/2 in. Feeder Line Heat Shrink Tube (Jelly Type) 1/2 in. Feeder Line Figure 3.56 RF Cable Connection (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 3-77 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 3. Connecting Cables Checking RF Cable Connection After connecting the RF cables, perform the continuity test and feeder cable return loss to check if the RF cable is changed and measure VSWR of antenna and RF cable. Connection Part of System External Interface Connector Antenna Measure all cables of section ~ . The measured VSWR should be the specification value or less. If the VSWR exceeds the specification value, disassemble the connector and measure each section separately. Checking VSWR for Minimum Cable Bend Radius and Length of RF Cable If the VSWR value for minimum cable bend radius and length of RF cable is not applied, system may not work properly because RF signals cannot transmit or receive smoothly. So, the VSWR value for minimum cable bend radius and length of RF cable must be checked and applied. Cautions When Measuring VSWR When measuring VSWR, if you open the antenna port when the transmission output is not completely off, a spike signal may flow into the reception path, which may cause damage to LNA. Make sure the transmission output is completely off when measuring VSWR. Checking the Specifications of Antenna/Arrestor Connector Depending on the supplier or manufacturer of antenna/arrestor the connector type may be different. Also, the detail specifications of a connector may be different depending on cable type even for the same connector type. Therefore, check the detail specifications of a connector before preparing parts. Ex) Din Type-Male: for 1/2 in. Feeder line, for 7/8 in. Feeder Line 3-78 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual CHAPTER 4. Checking Installation Status 4.1 Installation Checking Procedure Below is the procedure to check installation status. Inspection Plan On-site Inspection Inspection Checklist Sharing Inspection Results Inspection Checklist/Corrective Actions Taking Corrective Actions Checking the Results of Corrective Actions OK Nok Sharing the Results of Corrective Actions and Preparing Preventive Plan Figure 4.1 Installation Checking Procedure SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 4-1 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 4. Checking Installation Status Inspection Plan Create an inspection sheet per system and select an inspector to set an inspection schedule per site. On-site Inspection and Inspection Checklist The on-site inspection is to perform inspection visually or using instruments for each specification, standard, and installation status, etc. based on the inspection checklist actually at a site where the system ins installed. The inspector must record the results onto the inspection checklist during or after filed inspection. Sharing Inspection Results and Taking Corrective Actions The inspector must share the inspection results (inspection checklist/corrective actions) with a installation operator and the installation operator must take the corrective actions if necessary after reviewing the requirements. Checking the Results of Corrective Actions The inspector must check if the corrective actions are properly taken. If they are not sufficient, the inspector must ask the installation operator to take the corrective actions again. Sharing the Results of Corrective Actions and Preparing Preventive Plan After the corrective actions are all completed, the inspector must share the results with the installation operator and relevant departments and prepare a preventive plan to prevent the same or similar problems from re-occurring. Table 4.1 Construction Situation Checklist Category Check Items Criteria Result Pass Fail Installing Equipment Appearance of equipment and mechanical parts Placement of equipment and mechanical parts Leveling condition of equipment and mechanical parts Validity of status and specifications of tightening bolt/nut/washer, etc. Board/blank panel installation status Insulation status Other works (cable duct installation status, etc.) Equipment damage such as Dent, scratch and crack, etc. Maintenance and horizontal/vertical placement Horizontal/vertical fixing
(level, weight, rubber hose, etc.) Visual inspection and magnet check Compliance with tightening torque value Checking assembly status Checking electrical contact between insulators (insulation resistance tester) Checking position and installation status 4-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Table 4.1 Construction Situation Checklist (Continued) Category Check Items Criteria Grounding Status of ground bar installation per usage Cable Size Checking the separation of communication/power/lightning grounding Checking specifications such as thickness, etc. Cabling and binding status Cable damage/properness installation Cable connection Power Installation status of cable tag Installation status of power supply and circuit breaker Cable Size route Checking binding interval and the condition of used materials Assembly and tightening condition of a pressure terminal Checking compliance with tightening torque value Checking position, marking, and tag installation type Power supply capacity/input voltage
(tester) Checking circuit breaker type and capacity Checking thickness and length limitation Cabling and binding status Cable damage/properness installation Cable connection Installation status of cable tag Cable size Other data cables route Checking binding interval and the condition of used materials Cable damage/properness installation route Checking binding interval and the condition of used materials Checking position, marking, and tag installation type Checking cable specifications per usage Cabling and binding status Checking cable damage/properness Cable connection Installation status of cable tag installation route, binding distance and condition of used materials Checking cable connection (Pin Map), assembly and tightening status of a connector and compliance with tightening torque value Checking position, marking, and tag installation type Result Pass Fail SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 4-3 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 CHAPTER 4. Checking Installation Status Table 4.1 Construction Situation Checklist (Continued) Category Check Items Criteria RF Antenna installation status Checking specifications, installation position, fixing status, and gap between antennas Checking specifications, installation position, and fixing status Installation status of arrestor/line amplifier/splitter, etc. Cabling and binding status Checking cable damage/properness of installation route/binding distance and the condition of used materials Checking cable connection status, connector assembly and tightening status, compliance with tightening torque value, and finishing Checking position, marking, and tag installation type Finishing (dust cap, etc.) Installation of cable tag Cable connection Others Opinion Reserved ports and cable inlet status Connection of equipment I/O port (Conduit/Cable Gland) Installation of cable installation route Status of inside/outside of the equipment and system surrounding area Checking tightening status Installation of cable tray and duct, etc. Checking the stocking condition of waste parts, waste materials, packing materials, etc. Result Pass Fail 4-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ANNEX A. Sector Antenna Installation A.1 Cautions when Installing a Sector Antenna Precautions of antenna installation are as follows. Sector antennas should be installed vertically. (1) Antenna is the precise material, so be careful not to make damage or form change. When moving antenna, use the tool suitable to rating. In addition, use the rated carrying device which is at least 200 % or more than antenna considering the stability. If it rains, suspend connecting the feeder cable and antenna. Be careful not to give too much strength to the antenna. Fix it after adjusting the direction of antenna exactly. Distance between steel tower and antenna and the distance between send-receive antennas are based on the antenna layout. Attach the antenna on the position specified in the drawing. Install the antenna not to make a feature change of the antenna considering the direction of the radiation. Connect the antenna not making the alien substance flowed so that Passive Inter-
Modulation Distortion (PMID) is not affected. Measure VSWR of all antennas and the value should be within the regulated value. A.2 Sector Antenna Layout The method of sector antenna layout is as follows. 1) Use the transit to adjust the antenna installation direction exactly. 2) Fix the direction of the sector antenna, same as the angle settled when designing the cell after installing the steel tower. 3) Arrange the antennas of each sector to the sector directional angle at right angles by adjusting the distance between antenna and steel tower. In the event of the station whose the direction between sectors is not 120, install it to make the steel tower and antenna direction different being careful of the tilt and azimuth. 4) For circular platform, separate the antenna interval at maximum. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. A-1 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX A. Sector Antenna Installation A.3 Sector Antenna Installation The method of sector antenna installation is as follows. 1) Put up an antenna pole and insert the sector antenna into the antenna pole using a fixing clamp. 2) Set the antennas up/down tilt to 0 and fix the fixing clamps at the top and bottom. 3) Adjust the tilted angle of the antenna by taking the signal strength into account. The bolts on the upper and lower guide clamps must be loose as to allow angle adjustment of the antenna. 4) After adjusting the antenna angle, tighten up the 4 loose bolts on the upper and lower guide clamps. A-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Guide Clamp Bolt_3 Guide Clamp Bolt_1 Upper Fixing Clamp Upper Guide Clamp Pole Lower Guide Clamp Lower Fixing Clamp Guide Clamp Bolt_2 Main Radiation Direction Antenna Input Port Guide Clamp Bolt_4 Figure A.1 Sector Antenna SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. A-3 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX A. Sector Antenna Installation Installing the Antenna When you install the antenna, the antenna must be within the protective angle
(left/right side 45 each from the central axis) to prevent the antenna from lightning damage. Lightning Rod 45 45 Sector Antenna A-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ANNEX B. Installing Feeder Cable B.1 Cautions When Installing Feeder Cable When installing the feeder cable (GPS/RF cable), the following cautions shall be considered:
Put a plate to work not to make damage for the surface of the feeder cable. If there is external damage of the feeder cable, cut the damaged part and work wiring. After connecting the antenna to the feeder cable, finish the connection part of the contracted pipe using the contracted tube. Attach the cognitive tapes to the both ends of the feeder cable, which makes it easy to recognize. When connecting cabinet, antenna and lightening arrestor, etc. to the feeder cable, connect strongly to prevent from generating reflected wave. The curvature radius should be maximized, keep the minimum curvature radius. Table B.1 Curvature Radius of Feeder Cable for Outdoor Specification Allowed Radius of Curvature Remark Outdoor LS Feeder Line RFS Feeder Line 1/2 in. 7/8 in. 1-1/4 in. 1-5/8 in. 1/2 in. 7/8 in. HFC-12D HFC-22D HFC-33D HFC-42D LCF12-50 LCF78-50 LCFS114-50 1-1/4 in. LCF158-50 1-5/8 in. 4.02 in. (125 mm) 9.84 in. (250 mm) 14.96 in. (380 mm) 20.08 in. (510 mm) 4.92 in. (125 mm) 9.84 in. (250 mm) 14.96 in. (380 mm) 19.69 in. (500 mm) 1/2 in. 7/8 in. 1-1/4 in. 1-5/8 in. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. B-1 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX B. Installing Feeder Cable Table B.2 Curvature Radius of Feeder Cable for Indoor (Based on LS Feeder Line) Specification Allowed Radius of Curvature Remark Indoor LS Feeder Line HFSC 6D HFSC 10D HFSC 12D HFSC 22D RFS Feeder Line SCF14-50 SCF38-50 SCF12-50 UCF78-50 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 7/8 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 7/8 in. 0.98 in. (25 mm) 0.98 in. (25 mm) 1.26 in. (32 mm) 4.92 in. (125 mm) 0.98 in. (25 mm) 0.98 in. (25 mm) 1.26 in. (32 mm) 4.92 in. (125 mm) 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 7/8 in. Table B.3 Curvature Radius of LMR-400 (Based on Times Microwave System) Specification Allowed Radius of Curvature Remark LMR-400 1 in. (25.4 mm) 4 in. (101.6 mm) Installation Repeated Radius of Curvature of Feeder Line When installing a feeder line, the radius of curvature of the sections where cables bent should be larger than the allowed radius of curvature. If the radius of curvature for the feeder line installation is less than the allowed radius of curvature, it may affect the performance of the system. B-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Ensure that the feeder cable does not interfere with steel towers, ladders and in the areas chiefly used by people. Connect the connector to the antenna in a straight line and after connecting, do not apply excessive force. Use the vinyl tape for electricity and heat shrink tube for the external exposed part of the connector not to avoid leak water. Wind the self-bonding rubber tape overlapping (keep a distance as the half size of rubber tape) to the connector connection part and wind the vinyl tape for electricity to the 2 times or more and then cover with the jelly type heat shrink tube. Connection of Feeder Cable Connector Connecting the feeder cable connector is critical process, so the qualified workers who finished the related education should perform. Table B.4 Connector Connection Torque Value Connector SMA connector TNC connector N-type connector Din-type connector Torque Value 0.18 lbfft (2.5 kgfcm) 0.65 lbfft (9 kgfcm) 1.45 lbfft (20 kgfcm) 14.46 lbfft (200 kgfcm) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. B-3 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX B. Installing Feeder Cable B.2 7/8 in. Feeder Line Ground Ground Kit Ground the 7/8 in. feeder line using the grounding kit located under the Tower Ground Bar
(TGB) installed in the lower section of the tower or in the cable duct. The procedure for connecting the ground kit to the 7/8 in. feeder line is as follows:
Insulation Tape Rubber Tape Ground Kit M6 25L Hex. Bolt M6 Spring Washer M6 Plane Washer M6 Plane Washer M6 Spring Washer M6 Hex. Nut 1) Remove about 2.17 in. (55 mm) of the sheath of cable when the 7/8 in. feeder line is used. 2) Open it by returning hook of the clamp fixing for Ground kit in the left direction. 1 2
. n i 7 1 2
.
) m m 5 5
(
Figure B.1 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (1) B-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 3) Insert the ground kit clamp into the place from which the 7/8 in. feeder line sheath is removed. 4) Pull the clamp lock to the upward so that the lock can be hung on the global protrusion area on the side. 5) Overlap the exposed part of the ground kit clamp using rubber tape (Keep a distance as the half size of rubber tape) and press it with your hands lightly to make rubber tape adhere well. 6) Wrap the part where the rubber tape is attached using insulation tape two times or more. When cutting off the tape, cut it off neatly using a cutting device such as scissors or a knife. 3 7/8 in. Feeder Line Ground Kit Clamp 4 Protrusion area Clamp lock 5 Rubber Tape 6 Insulation Tape Scissors (knife) Figure B.2 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. B-5 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX B. Installing Feeder Cable 7) Align the heat shrink tube inserted when installing the 7/8 in. feeder line into the fixing part of the ground kit.
- Heat shrink tube: jelly type, 1.65 in., 7.87 in. ( 42 mm, 200 mm) 8) Shrink the heat shrink tube by heating gun. Heat Shrink Tube 7 7.87 in.
(200 mm) Heating Gun Heat Shrink Tube 8 Figure B.3 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (3) B-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 9) After the ground kit has been installed to the 7/8 in. feeder line, attach the pressure terminal (1 hole) of the ground cable connected to the ground kit to the TGB. 10) When attaching the pressure terminal, use M6 25L hex. Bolts. 7/8 in. Feeder Line M6 25L Hex. Bolt (STS304) Ground kit Pressure Terminal
(1 Hole) TGB Ground Cable (F-GV 35 mm2 1C) TGB (Tower Ground Bar) Figure B.4 7/8 in. Feeder Line Grounding (4) Checking the Ground Kit and TGB Specifications The specifications, clamp, and pressure terminal type of the ground kit and TGB differ depending on manufacturers. Make sure to check the specifications of the ground kit and TGB, and identify the installation method before installing it. Table B.5 TGB Installation Example Description Category TGB Usage TGB Location Earth terminal board for RF cable for grounding in using the feeder line of more than 7/8 in. Lower section of cable rack in feeder cable duck
- Less than 65.62 ft (20 m): 1 (Ex. steel tower lower section)
- Exceed 65.62 ft (20 m): 2 or more (Ex. steel tower lower and upper section) Pure copper Using the insulator to separate from the steel tower electrically Material Installation Method Connection Method Extract the GV 35 mm2 ground cable to the direction of the floor and weld it to the towers ground cable. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. B-7 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX B. Installing Feeder Cable B.3 Tower Ground Construction 1) Install a Tower Ground Bar (TGB) that will be used to ground a RF cable onto the tower. If the height of the tower is exceeds 65.62 ft (20 m), two or more TGBs should be installed (onto the lower and upper sections of the tower). If the tower is 65.62 ft (20 m) or less, one TGB should be installed. Since the TGB installation location and the number of TGBs to be installed can differ depending on the system environment and providers standards, consult your service provider. 2) Each TGB should be grounded and separated from other grounds. If there is an existing ground bar or ground cable for TGB, install the TGB by branching from it using a ground cable (GV35 mm2 1C) ground cable. (However, the specification of TGB ground cable can be different, defending on the standard of service provider.) 3) Tighten the Ground Kit (RF cable grounding assembly) to the TGB ground terminal and the tower hole using the pressure terminal hole attached at the end of the ground kits ground cable. Lightning Rod Lightning Rod Ground Cable
(GV 95 mm2 1C) Ground Kit TGB (Tower Ground Bar)
[Tower Height>65.62 ft (20 m)]
TGB Ground Cable
(F-GV 35 mm2 1C) RF cable
(7/8 in. Feeder Line or more) Ground Kit TGB (Tower Ground Bar) TGB Ground Cable
(F-GV 35 mm2 1C) TGB Ground Cable
(F-GV 95 mm2 1C) Figure B.5 Connecting the Tower Ground Cable B-8 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ANNEX C. Connector Assembly C.1 RJ-45 (Shield Type) Procedure that assembles the RJ-45 (shield type) connector is as follows:
1 2 3 1), 2) Prepare work tools and materials. 3) Pass the cable through the marking tube. 4 5 6 4) Pass the cable through the 5) Remove the coating 0.67 in. RJ-45 cap.
(17 mm) from the end. 6) Push the shield backward, and cut the aluminum shield. 7 8 9 7) Cut the shield leaving a 0.2 in. 8) Arrange the cable in reference 9) Cut the cable to make it
(5 mm) of it. to the pin map. 0.47 in.(12 mm) long. Figure C.1 Assembling the RJ-45 Connector (Shield Type) (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-1 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX C. Connector Assembly 10 11 12 10) Insert the RJ-45 modular jack. 11) Make sure that the shield does not get in the RJ-45 modular jack. 12) Insert the cable completely into the RJ-45 modular jack. 13 14 13) Compress the jack using the tool. 14) Compress the marking tube to finish the assembly. Figure C.2 Assembling the RJ-45 Connector (Shield Type) (2) C-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual C.2 RJ-45 (Normal Type) Procedure that assembles the RJ-45 (normal type) connector is as follows:
1 2 3 1) Prepare work tools and 2) Insert the RJ-45 cap to the 3) Remove the coating 0.67 in. materials. 4 cable. 5
(17 mm) from the end. 6 4) Arrange the cable in reference 5) Cut the cable to make it to the pin map. 0.47 in. (12 mm) long. 6) Insert the cable completely into the RJ-45 modular jack. 7 8 7) Compress the jack using the 8) Push the RJ-45 cap to the tool. connector. Figure C.3 Assembling the RJ-45 Connector (Normal Type) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-3 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX C. Connector Assembly C.3 N type-male (LMR-400) Below is the procedure for assembling the N type-male cable connector to LMR-400 cable. 1) The components of the N type-male include N type-male body, clamp ring, and heat shrink tube. Clamp Ring Heat Shrink Tube N type-Male Body Clamp Ring Heat Shrink Tube 2) Insert a heat shrink tube and clamp ring to the cable, and insert the cable into the End1 of the prep/strip tool. Then remove the shield and sheath except for the center conductor at the end of cable by rotating the tool clockwise. Prep/strip Tool End1 Center Conductor LMR-400 3) Insert the cable into the End2 of the prep/strip tool again, and remove the sheath except for the shield by rotating the tool. Shield LMR-400 4) Trim the end of the center conductor by using a deburring tool. Prep/strip Tool End2 Deburring tool Figure C.4 N type-male Connector Assembling (1) C-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 5) Push a connector into the end of the cable. Then, push it further until the center conductor is firmly inserted into the pin connection part of the N-Type male body. Make the shield overlap the N-Type male body, pull out the clamp ring, and let it go to its original position so that the remaining length may be folded. 6) Cut off the folded length of the shield using a cutting device so that it does not protrude outside when the clamp ring is inserted. After arranging the shield, push up the clamp ring toward the connector until the entire shield is covered. 7) Using a compressor and hexagonal dies, pressurize the clamp ring to fix the cable and connector. 8) Lift the heat shrink tube up to the connection point on the connector and shrink the heat shrink tube using a heating gun. Figure C.5 N type-male Connector Assembling (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-5 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX C. Connector Assembly C.4 TNC-male (LMR-400) Below is the procedure for assembling the TNC-male cable connector to LMR-400 cable. 1) The components of the TNC-male include TNC-
male body, clamp ring, and heat shrink tube. Clamp Ring Heat Shrink Tube TNC-Male Body Clamp Ring Heat Shrink Tube 2) Insert a heat shrink tube and clamp ring to the cable, and insert the cable into the End1 of the prep/strip tool. Then remove the shield and sheath except for the center conductor at the end of cable by rotating the tool clockwise. Prep/strip tool End1 Center Conductor LMR-400 3) Insert the cable into the End2 of the prep/strip tool again, and remove the sheath by rotating the tool. Prep/strip tool End2 Shield LMR-400 4) Trim the end of the center conductor by using a deburring tool. Deburring tool Figure C.6 TNC-male Connector Assembling (1) C-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 5) Push a connector into the end of the cable. Then, push it further until the center conductor is firmly inserted into the pin connection part of the N-Type male body. Make the shield overlap the N-Type male body, pull out the clamp ring, and let it go to its original position so that the remaining len1/2 in. be folded. 6) Cut off the folded length of the shield using a cutting device so that it does not protrude outside when the clamp ring is inserted. After arranging the shield, push up the clamp ring toward the connector until the entire shield is covered. 7) Using a compressor and hexagonal dies, pressurize the clamp ring to fix the cable and connector. 8) Lift the heat shrink tube up to the connection point on the connector and shrink the heat shrink tube using a heating gun. Figure C.7 TNC-male Connector Assembling (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-7 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX C. Connector Assembly C.5 N type-male (1/2 in. feeder line) Below is the method for assembling the N type-male connector to the 1/2 in. feeder line. 1) The components of the N type-male are an N type-male body, an insert ring, a clamping nut, O-ring, and a heat shrink tube, and it is assembled using the wire stripper, trimming tool, spanner, etc. O-Ring Clamping Nut Insert Ring Heat Shrink Tube
[1.1 in. (28 mm)]
N type-Male Body 1/2 in. Feeder Line Trimming Tool 2) Using a stripping tool or a knife, strip the 1/2 in. feeder line by 1 in. (25.4 mm) from the end, as shown in the figure below. 1/2 in. Feeder Line Conductor 1/2 in. Feeder Line Jacket 1 in. (25.4 mm) Figure C.8 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (1) C-8 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 3) Remove the 0.43 in. (11 mm) of the external conductor end and 0.39 in. (10 mm) of the jacket using a trimming tool. Trimming Tool Collet 4) Insert the internal conductor into the deburring hole at the bottom of the trimming tool to trim it. 0.94 in.
(24 mm) 0.43 in.
(11 mm) Figure C.9 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-9 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX C. Connector Assembly 5) Insert the o-ring, clamping nut, insert ring and N type-male body to the stripped 1/2 in. feeder line in this order. O-ring is inserted into the second groove from inside of outer insulator. 6) Tighten the clamping nut and N type-male body inserted into the 1/2 in. feeder line firmly using a spanner. The recommended torque for tightening the clamping nut and N type-male body is 306~510 lbfft (30~
50 N.m). (Note that it should only be tightened by rotating the external body with the clamping nut in a fixed and stable position.) O-Ring Clamping Nut Insert Ring N type-Male Body Keep the fixed state Figure C.10 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (3) C-10 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 7) Insert the heat shrink tube into the 1/2 in. feeder line fitted with the N type-male connector as shown in the Figure below.
- Heat shrink tube: 1.1 in., 3.94 in. ( 28 mm, 100 mm) 8) Shrink the heat shrink tube inserted into the 1/2 in. feeder line using a heating gun. Clamping Nut Heat Shrink Tube (1.1 in.) Heating Gun Figure C.11 Assembling the N type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (4) Checking to carry out when assembling the N type-male connector The shape, tool and assembly method may differ depending on the connector type and manufacturer. Make sure to check the user manual provided by the manufacturer before assembling. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-11 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX C. Connector Assembly C.6 Din type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Below is the method for assembling the Din type-male connector to the 1/2 in. feeder line. 1) The components of the Din type-male are an Din type-male body, pin, an insert ring, a clamping nut, o-ring, and a heat shrink tube, and it is assembled using the wire stripper, trimming tool, wrench, etc. Pin Clamping Nut Feeder Line Din Type-Male Body Insert Ring O-Ring Heat Shrink Tube 2) Straighten the cable, then, using a suitable tool, strip it to the connectors wire strip length. When cutting the sheath, hold the cable firmly with one hand and cut the cable pulling the cutting tool inwards with the other hand. Gently rotate the tool several times (do not pull it too hard), so that the internal copper line is not damaged. Cutting Tool 3) Using a cutter, cut the sheath from the stripped edge to the end of the cable and completely strip the sheath. Cutter Feeder Line 4) Insert the o-ring, clamping nut, insert ring, pin and Din type-male body into the stripped feeder line in this order. Figure C.12 Assembling the Din type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (1) C-12 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 5) Tighten firmly the clamping nut and Din type-male body inserted to the 1/2 in. feeder line using a wrench. The recommended torque for tightening the clamping nut and Din type-male body is 30~50 N.m.
(Note that it should only be tightened by rotating the external body with the clamping nut in a fixed and stable position.) Spanner (keep the fixed state) Clamping Nut Din Type-Male Body 6) Insert the heat shrink tube to the 1/2 in. feeder line fitted with the Din type-male connector; and shrink the heat shrink tube inserted into the feeder line using a heating gun.
- Heat shrink tube: 1.1 in., 3.94 in. ( 28 mm, 100 mm) Heating Gun Heat Shrink Tube Figure C.13 Assembling the Din type-male (1/2 in. Feeder Line) Connector (2) Checking to carry out when assembling the Din type-male connector The shape, tool and assembly method may differ depending on the connector type and manufacturer. Make sure to check the user manual provided by the manufacturer before assembling. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-13 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX C. Connector Assembly C.7 Finishing the Connector Connection Part by Tape Finishing the connector connection part by tape (insulation tape, rubber tape, etc.) in the outdoor environment is as follows:
1) Overlap the exposed part of the connector connection part using rubber tape (Keep a distance as the half size of rubber tape) and press it with your hands lightly to make rubber tape adhere well. 2) Wrap the part where the rubber tape is attached using insulation tape two times or more. When cutting off the tape, cut it off neatly using a cutting device such as scissors or a knife. 3) Bind the end part of the insulation tape using cable tie to prevent slips. Rubber Tape Insulation Tape Cable Tie Figure C.14 Finishing the Connector Connection Part by Tape C-14 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual C.8 How to Shrink the Heat Shrink Tube C.8.1 When Assembling a Connector to the Feeder Line Below is the procedure for shrinking the heat shrink tube. 1/2 in. Feeder Line 1) Prepare a 1/2 in. feeder line, heat shrink tube, and heating gun to finish the cable using a heat shrink tube. 1/2 in. Connector Heat Shrink Tube (Jelly Type) 28/6 5.9 in. (150 mm) Heating Gun 2) Insert the heat shrink tube into the 1/2 in. feeder line, and then place the heat shrink tube at the end of the cutting area of the connector where the tool will be used. Cutting Area 3) Set the heating gun to 482 to 572F (250 to 300C). Figure C.15 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Feeder Line (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-15 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX C. Connector Assembly Heat Shrink Tube 4) Holding one end of the heat shrink tube with your hand, apply heat starting from the connector using the heating gun. Heating Gun 5) Rotate the heating gun so that heat is evenly distributed to prevent that bubbles are generated or heat is concentrated to a specific part. 6) Shrink the heat shrink tube until jelly appears at the end part of it (refer the Figure below) and finish it. Jelly Figure C.16 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Feeder Line (2) C-16 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual C.8.2 When Connecting a Connector to another Connector Below is the procedure for shrinking the heat shrink tube. Connector 1/2 in. Feeder Line 1) Prepare a 1/2 in. feeder line, 7/8 in. feeder line, heat shrink tube, and heating gun to finish the cable using a heat shrink tube. Heat Shrink Tube (Jelly Type) 38/12 11.81 in. (300 mm) 7/8 in. Feeder Line 2) Inset the heat shrink tube to one end of the feeder line and connect the connector. Heating Gun 3) Insert the heat shrink tube, placing connector part
(where 1/2 in. and 7/8 in. feeder line will be connected) in the center, and mark the center part. Figure C.17 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Connection between Connectors (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-17 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX C. Connector Assembly 4) Set the heating gun to 482 to 572F (250 to 300C). 5) Holding one end of the heat shrink tube with your hand, apply heat starting from the marked part at the center using the heating gun. Heat Shrink Tube Heating Gun 6) Rotate the heating gun so that heat is evenly distributed to prevent that bubbles are generated or heat is concentrated to a specific part. Figure C.18 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Connection between Connectors (2) C-18 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 7) Shrink the heat shrink tube until jelly appears at the end part of it (refer the figure below) and finish it. Jelly Figure C.19 Shrinking the Heat Shrink Tube_Connection between Connectors (3) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. C-19 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX C. Connector Assembly Check for Working with the Heat Shrink Tube
- If you work without holding one end of the heat shrink tube, the location of the heat shrink tube may be changed. Therefore, make sure to hold one end of it when applying heat.
- The connector part where 1/2 in. and 7/8 in. feeder line are connected must be the center of the heat shrink tube. After inserting the heat shrink tube, mark the center part.
- If jelly does not appear on the end of the heat shrink tube, it may mean that it is not shrunk properly. Apply heat until jelly appears using a heating gun. Jelly C-20 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ANNEX D. Cleaning Optic Connector D.1 Cleaning Optic Connector When connecting optical cable to the system, performance of system can be decreased or fails can occur if core section of optical connector is dirty due to dust or foreign material. Therefore, worker should clean the optic connector before connecting optic cable to the system to prevent this phenomenon. This manual describes the method that cleans optic connector when using the IBCTM Brand cleaner. Caution When Connecting the Optical Cable Check whether there is dust or foreign material on the cutting section of the connector core before connecting the optic cable, and keep this away from dust or foreign material. If the cable is soiled with foreign material, do not blow to remove them. Make sure to clean the connector in accordance with the cleaning directions below. When using Optic Connector Cleaner When using optic connector cleaner, use the products shown in the example below or their equivalents. Ex) Manufacturer-USCONEC (http://www.usconec.com)
- IBCTM Brand Cleaner (P/N: 9393): For LC-LC and MU Connector Cleaning
- IBCTM Brand Cleaner (P/N: 9392): For SC Connector Cleaning
- IBCTM Brand Cleaner (P/N: 12910): For ODC Connector Cleaning Manufacturer-TheFibers (www.thefibers.com)
- HuxCleaner 1.25 mm Type: For LC and MU Connector Cleaning
- HuxCleaner 2.5 mm Type: For SC, FC and ST Connector Cleaning SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. D-1 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX D. Cleaning Optic Connector D.2 IBCTM Brand Cleaner Method that uses IBCTM Brand Cleaner is as follows:
D.2.1 IBCTM Brand Type Cleaner (P/N 9393) Method that uses IBCTM Brand Cleaner for LC-LC and MU connector is as follows:
Guide Cap Nozzle Outer Shell Lock Button
(for Extend Nozzle)
[Optic Connector Cleaner Configuration]
Lock Button
(for Extend Nozzle)
[Nozzle Extension]
Guide Cap Guide Cap Guide Cap Cover
[In Case of LC type Connector (Plug)]
[In Case of LC type Connector (Jack)]
Figure D.1 Optic Connector Cleaner (IBCTM Brand Type Cleaner: P/N 9393) D-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Optic Module Cleaning (LC Type Jack) 1) To clean the optic module, remove the guide cap from the cleaner (P/N: 9393). Guide Cap Nozzle Outer Shell
[IBC Brand Cleaner: P/N 9393]
2) Insert a cleaner guide cap to every core of the optic module. Clean it by pushing the outer shell toward the nozzle until you hear the sound of the detergent being sprayed. (Repeat once or twice.) Optic Module Nozzle Outer Shell Figure D.2 Optic Module Cleaning (LC Type Jack) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. D-3 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX D. Cleaning Optic Connector Optic Cable Connector Cleaning (LC Type Plug) 1) To clean the optic cable connector, open the guide cap cover from the cleaner (P/N: 9393). Guide Cap Nozzle Outer Shell Guide Cap Cover
[IBC Brand Cleaner: P/N 9393]
2) Insert a cleaner guide cap to every core of the optic cable connector. Clean it by pushing the outer shell toward the nozzle until you hear the sound of the detergent being sprayed. (Repeat once or twice.) Guide Cap Nozzle Outer Shell LC Type Connector D-4 Figure D.3 Optic Cable Connector Cleaning (LC Type Plug) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Measuring the Optical Output and Connecting the Optic Connector 1) Check the optical output again using an optic power meter. 2) If the optical output measurement result meets the reference value, clean the connector again and connect it. If the measurement result does not meet the reference value, discard the cable, replace it with a new cable, and then clean the new one and connect it to the system.
[LC/PC Plug]
Figure D.4 Measuring the Optical Output and Connecting the Optic Connector
[Optic Powermeter]
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. D-5 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX D. Cleaning Optic Connector This page is intentionally left blank. D-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ANNEX E. Cable Gland Assembly Caution When Assembling Cable Gland If the parts of a cable gland in the system are not correctly installed, outdoor air and moisture may flow into the system and cause corrosion, system fault, or serious fault to the cooling system. Therefore, assemble and finish the cable gland accurately. Caution When Installing Cable in the Cable Gland Only one cable of permitted specification (thickness) should be installed in the cable gland.
- The outdoor air or moisture may flow into the system if a cable that is thinner than the specification is used.
- If a cable is thicker than the specification or more than two cables are installed, the cable gland may be damaged. Caution When Loosening or Tightening Cable Gland Nut When assembling the cable gland or connecting it to a cable, make sure not to turn other parts (cable gland body) than a gland nut to loosen or tighten the gland. Turning the cable gland body may cause the influx of external air or moisture into the system, which may result in corrosion or system malfunction. Torque Wrench Cable Gland Body Torque Wrench Cable Gland Nut SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. E-1 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX E. Cable Gland Assembly Use Torque Wrench When Tightening Cable Gland Nut Tighten the cable gland nut using a torque wrench with standard torque. Torque Wrench E.1 Cable Gland Components The components of the cable gland are as follows. By loosening the gland nuts outside the unit, the cable gland is dissembled into 3 parts as shown in the picture below. (Except for system-side fixing parts) Protection Cover Cable Gland Nut Rain-proof Filler Figure E.1 Cable Gland Components E-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual E.2 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling When assembling a cable gland, follow the below steps to prevent any moisture or foreign substance from coming in. 1) Check the cable gland built on the unit to see whether it has the protection cover inside the cable gland nut as shown in the picture below (cross-section picture of outer wall of the unit), the same as the original factory configuration.
[Side picture]
Protection Cover Cable Gland Nut 2) Separate the cable gland nut by loosening counterclockwise. Here, check the protection cover
(circular transparent plate).
[When a cable gland nut is disassembled]
Protection Cover 3) Remove the protection cover and keep it carefully.
[When the protection cover is removed]
Cable Gland Nut Protection Cover Figure E.2 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. E-3 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX E. Cable Gland Assembly 4) Separate the waterproof filler from the cable gland body.
[When the rainproof filler is disassembled]
Rain-proof Filler 5) Install the cable by passing it through the cable gland nut from outside to inside. Cable Cable Gland Nut Inside Outside 6) After installing the cable through the cable gland body, connect it to the system according to assembling standard and clean up the rest of the cable. 7) Put the rainproof filler on the cable inside the cable gland nut. At this time, widen the waterproof filler and wrap the cable around. Grooves of Rain-proof Filler Inside Outside Rain-proof Filler Cable Cable Gland Nut Figure E.3 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling (2) E-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 8) Push the waterproof filler into the cable gland body. There are bumps inside of a cable gland body and outside of a rainproof filler, which allow easy coupling while preventing slippery rotation. Align the bumps and push the rainproof filler into the cable gland body. Bumps of Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Body Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut Cable 9) Attach the waterproof filler into the cable gland body as shown in the picture below. Make sure it is pushed in completely. X O Cable Cable Gland Body Rain-proof Filler Cable Gland Nut 10) Attach the cable gland nut and the cable gland body together and tighten the nut clockwise. Cable Cable Gland Body Cable Gland Nut Figure E.4 Cable Gland Assembly and Cabling (3) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. E-5 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX E. Cable Gland Assembly E.3 Unused Cable Gland Inspection and Assembly The unused cable gland should not be disassembled, and be kept in the original factory configuration. If the cable gland is disassembled, it should be assembled to the factory default by referring to the sequence of Cable Gland Parts Configuration. Outside of the System Inside of the System Cable Gland Washer Cable Gland Body Rain-proof Filler System Frame Protection Cover Cable Gland Nut Figure E.5 Unused Cable Gland Inspection and Assembly Checking Assembly State of the Unused Cable Gland All components of the unused cable gland must be secured in the original factory configuration. If the cable gland nut is fitted without the waterproof filler or the protection cover in place, reassemble them as illustrated in Unused Cable Gland Inspection and Assembly. E-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly F.1 Preparations The followings must be prepared to connect a pressure terminal to a cable.
[Cable]
[Pressure Terminal]
[Heat Shrink Tube]
[Cable Cutter]
[Wire Stripper]
[Handheld Compressor]
[Hydraulic Press]
[Marking Pen]
[Cutter Blade]
[Steel Ruler]
[Scissors]
[Heating Gun]
Figure F.1 Preparations SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. F-1 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly F.2 Pressure Reference Table The pressure reference table used to assemble a pressure terminal to a cable is shown below. Table F.1 Pressure Reference Table for Pressure Terminal Category Number of pressure points Copper tube length of a pressure terminal mm In. 0.43 in. 0.47~0.59 in. 0.63~0.91 in. 0.94~1.26 in. 1.3 in. or more 1.18 in. or less 1.22~1.85 in. 1.89~2.48 in. 2.52 in. or more Hand Hand Hand Hand Hand Hydraulic Hydraulic Hydraulic Hydraulic 11 mm or less 12~15 mm 16~23 mm 24~32 mm 33 mm or more 30 mm or less 31~47 mm 48~63 mm 64 mm or more
) 5 1 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 Unit: in. (mm)
. 4
(
8 1 0
.
) 1 1
(
3 4 0
.
) 2 1
(
7 4 0
.
) 5 1
(
9 5 0
.
) 6 1
(
3 6 0
.
) 3 2
(
1 9 0
.
[1-spot]
[2-spot]
[3-spot]
) 4 2
(
. n i 4 9
. 0
) 2 3
(
6 2
. 1
[4-spot]
) 6 1
(
3 6
. 0
) 5
. 4
(
8 1
. 0 Copper Tube Starting Middle of Copper Tube Arbitrary Fixing Reference Points Figure F.2 Pressure Reference Drawing (Handheld Compressor) F-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Unit: in. (mm)
) 5
. 3 1
(
3 5
. 0
) 0 3
(
8 1
. 1
) 1 3
(
2 2
. 1
) 7 4
(
5 8
. 1
) 3 6
(
8 4
. 2
) 8 4
(
9 8
. 1
[2-spot]
[3-spot]
[4-spot]
) 4 6
(
2 5 2
.
) 1 3
(
2 2
. 1
[4-spot]
.
) 5 3 1
(
3 5
. 0 Copper Tube Starting Duplicate Pressure Arbitrary Fixing Reference Points Figure F.3 Pressure Reference Drawing (Hydraulic Press) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. F-3 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly Table F.2 Compressor Specifications per Cable Thickness Cable Size
(mm2) Small Handheld Press Large Handheld Press Hydraulic Press
(AK-38, 100)
(IZUMI Hexagonal Dies) Press Size 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 2 2 5.5 8 14 22 38 X X X X X X 8 14 22 38 60 80 100 X X X X 16 25 35 50 70 95~300 F-4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual F.3 Assembling Pressure Terminal The procedures for assembling a pressure terminal to a cable are as follows:
Strip the Cable Sheath 1) After checking the inside length of a pressure terminal, mark the cable. 2) Adjust the length of a cutter blade according to the sheath thickness of the cable. 3) Push the clamp with a thumb a ccording to the cable size to secure a space for the cable. 4) Put a cable into a clamp, locate a blade on a marking position, and push it into the sheath. 5) Align the stripper to be perpendicular to the cable and rotate it more than two laps. Figure F.4 Stripping Cable Sheath (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. F-5 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly 6) Push the lever of the stripper to the right to turn its blade at 90. 7) Move the stripper up to the end of cable while maintaining the stripper to be perpendicular to the cable. 8) Remove the sheath. Figure F.5 Stripping Cable Sheath (2) F-6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Checking When Using A Wire Stripper A wire stripper is used differently depending on its manufacturer or type. Therefore, refer to the user manual enclosed with the product. The specifications and cautions of a wire stripper described in this manual are as follows:
Vender: Weidmuller Model: Weidmuller-AM25 (Order No-
9001080000) Specifications: For outer diameter 0.24~0.94 in.
(6~24 mm) PVC clothing Up to 4.5 mm clothing cutting depth
- To prevent the cutter blade of a wire stripper from touching the cable conductor, adjust the length of cutter blade by checking the cable sheath thickness.
- Make sure that the cutter blade goes into the cable sheath completely.
- Rotate the wire stripper perpendicularly to the cable.
[X]
[O]
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. F-7 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly Fixing Pressure Terminal (Handheld Compressor) 1) Insert the conductor of the cable with the sheath stripped to the internal end of pressure terminal. For a ring type pressure terminal, push it in until the conduct comes out 1 mm from the end of the terminal. 2) From the holes of handheld compressor, select one that fits to the pressure terminal. 3) Insert the pressure terminal to the selected hole. 4) Fix the pressure terminal and cable temporarily so the position can be changed later by pressing the compressor. F-8 Figure F.6 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Handheld Compressor (1) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 5) After complementary of the cable which is temporary fixed, align it to the hole and firmly compress the pressure terminal to secure fix it. 6) Separate the pressure terminal from the handheld compressor. Press down the handle of compressor until a clicking sound is heard to be unlocked. Figure F.7 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Handheld Compressor (2) Checking When Using A Handheld Compressor A handheld compressor is used differently depending on its manufacturer or type. Therefore, refer to the user manual enclosed with the product. The specifications and cautions of a handheld compressor described in this manual are as follows:
Vender: GALLEX Model: GL-2045A-22 Specification: 5.5 mm2, 8 mm2, 14 mm2, 22 mm2 (JIS) 6 mm2, 10 mm2, 16 mm2, 25 mm2 (DIN) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. F-9 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly Fixing Pressure Terminal (Hydraulic Press) 1) Among the dies of the hydraulic press, select one that fits to the pressure terminal. Dies Hydraulic Press 2) Assemble the dies to the pressing area of the compressor. 3) Insert the pressure terminal into the pressing area and fix it slightly by aligning it to the end of cable sheath. Figure F.8 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Hydraulic Press (1) F-10 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 4) Move the compressor lever up and down to press the pressure terminal firmly. 5) Turn the top compressing lever clockwise and then push it down. When the pressing area of compressor is loosened, remove the pressure terminal. Figure F.9 Fixing Pressure Terminal_Hydraulic Press (2) SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. F-11 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly Checking When Using a Hydraulic Press A hydraulic press is used differently depending on its manufacturer or type. Therefore, refer to the user manual enclosed with the product. The specifications and cautions of a hydraulic press described in this manual are as follows:
Vender: IZUMI Model: IZUMI-EP-510B Specification: Circular 32~160 (SQ) Hex 14~325 (SQ) F-12 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual Assembling Heat Shrink Tube 1) After assembling a pressure terminal, move the heat shrink tube, inserted to the cable, to the end of pressure terminal copper tube. Heat Shrink Tube Pressure Terminal 2) Set the temperature of the heat gun to 356-392(180-200C). 3) Locate a heat shrink tube to cover the entire copper tube of the pressure terminal. 4) Rotate a heat gun 360 to apply heat evenly to shrink the tube.
(Because the pressure terminal and the cable is hot due to the heat of a heating gun, be careful not to have a burn.) Figure F.10 Assembling Heat Shrink Tube SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. F-13 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX F. Pressure Terminal Assembly This page is intentionally left blank. F-14 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ANNEX G. Standard Torque When you tighten the bolt, refer to the standard torque value below to prevent the equipment and bolt from damage and secure by tightening. When the torque value for each connection part is defined already, refer to the defined value. Table G.1 Standard Torque Value for Tightening Bolts Bolt Spec. Torque Value (kgf.cm) Torque Value (N.m) Torque Value (lbf.ft) M3 M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 4.08~6.12 9.52~14.28 20.0~30.0 33.28~49.92 82.4~123.6 166.4~249.6 292.0~438.0 0.40~0.60 0.93~1.40 1.96~2.94 3.26~4.90 8.08~12.12 16.32~24.48 28.64~42.65 0.29~0.44 0.69~1.03 1.45~2.17 2.41~3.61 5.96~8.94 12.03~18.05 21.11~31.67 Table G.2 Brass Bolts Torque Value Bolt Spec. Torque Value (kgf.cm) Torque Value (N.m) Torque Value (lbf.ft) M6 M8 29.98 10 %
64.26 10 %
2.94 10 %
6.3 10 %
2.17 10 %
4.16 10 %
Checking Standard Torque Value Torque value can be different, defending on the material, characteristic and specification of the equipment and fastener. Make sure to check the proper torque value for each specification of the equipment and fastener. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. G-1 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ANNEX G. Standard Torque This page is intentionally left blank. G-2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual ABBREVIATION C D E L M R T U CPRI DU eNB L9CA LTE MGB MIMO RET RF RRH TGB UADU UAMA Common Public Radio Interface Digital Unit evolved UTRAN Node-B LTE eNB Channel card board Assembly Long Term Evolution Main Ground Bar Multiple-Input Multiple-Output Remote Electrical Tilt Radio Frequency Remote Radio Head Tower Ground Bar Universal Platform type A Digital Unit Universal platform type A Management board Assembly SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. I 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 ABBREVIATION V VSWR Voltage Standing Waveform Ratio II SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. MPE Information Warning: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. In order to avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna should not be less than 300 cm during normal operation. The gain of the antenna is 17.0 dBi.The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2600-00F1W8GAA Ver. 4.0 Mobile WiMAX/TD-LTE Smart MBS, U-RAS Flexible V2 RRH-B4 Installation Manual 2012 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Information in this manual is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. No information contained here may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated by any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG. Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
1 2 3 4 | Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 304.50 KiB | / December 03 2013 |
INTERNAL PHOTOGRAPHS FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 105-1, JANGAM-RI, MAJANG-MYEON, ICHEON-SI, KYUNGGI-DO, 467-811 KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD Page of 4 INTERNAL PHOTO FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 105-1, JANGAM-RI, MAJANG-MYEON, ICHEON-SI, KYUNGGI-DO, 467-811 KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD Page of 4 INTERNAL PHOTO FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 105-1, JANGAM-RI, MAJANG-MYEON, ICHEON-SI, KYUNGGI-DO, 467-811 KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD Page of 4 INTERNAL PHOTO FCC ID: A3LSLS-BD106Q 105-1, JANGAM-RI, MAJANG-MYEON, ICHEON-SI, KYUNGGI-DO, 467-811 KOREA TEL : + 82 31 645 6300 FAX : + 82 31 645 6401 www.hct.co.kr HCT CO., LTD Page of 4
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2018-01-23 | 2496 ~ 2690 | TNB - Licensed Non-Broadcast Station Transmitter | Class II Permissive Change |
2 | 2013-03-14 | 2496 ~ 2690 | TNB - Licensed Non-Broadcast Station Transmitter | |
3 | 2012-12-20 | 2496 ~ 2690 | TNB - Licensed Non-Broadcast Station Transmitter | |
4 | 2012-09-13 | 2496 ~ 2690 | TNB - Licensed Non-Broadcast Station Transmitter | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 | Effective |
2018-01-23
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
2013-03-14
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
2012-12-20
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
2012-09-13
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0005810205
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
19 Chapin Rd., Building D
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
Pine Brook, NJ
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Application Email Address |
k******@hctamerica.com;
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
L******@ul.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
c******@ccsemc.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Grantee Code |
A3L
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Product Code |
SLS-BD106Q
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
J**** C******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Title |
General Manager
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
973-8********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
973-8********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
j******@samsung.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Yes | |||||
1 2 3 4 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 09/10/2013 | ||||
1 2 3 4 | 06/18/2013 | |||||
1 2 3 4 | 03/12/2013 | |||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Class | TNB - Licensed Non-Broadcast Station Transmitter | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | RRH (Remote Radio Head) | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Remote Radio Head | |||||
1 2 3 4 | RRH (Remote RF Head) | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Grant Comments | C2PC to add TD-LTE 15MHz Channel BW as described in this application. Output power is combined conducted power per port. The device has four rf ports. The maximum power per port is 20W and the total maximum aggregate power across all four ports is 80W. With a single mode (TD-LTE or WiMax) operating on a port the maximum power per carrier for TD-LTE supporting one carrier per port is 20W, for two carriers per port the maximum power is 10W per carrier. The maximum powers for WiMax are 10W per carrier for 2 carriers per port, 5W per carrier for 4 carriers per port. With WiMax and TD-LTE modes operating simultaneously on a port the maximum powers are 5W per carrier for up to two carriers for WiMax and 10W for a TD-LTE single carrier. This device supports 4T4R Spatial Multiplexing MIMO. RF exposure compliance is addressed at the time of licensing, as required by the responsible FCC Bureau(s), including antenna co-location requirements of §1.1307(b)(3). | ||||
1 2 3 4 | C2PC to add alternative multi-carrier, multi-mode operations per transmit port as described in this application. Output power is combined conducted power per port. The device has four rf ports. The maximum power per port is 20W and the total maximum aggregate power across all four ports is 80W. With a single mode (TD-LTE or WiMax) operating on a port the maximum power per carrier for TD-LTE supporting one carrier per port is 20W, for two carriers per port the maximum power is 10W per carrier. The maximum powers for WiMax are 10W per carrier for 2 carriers per port, 5W per carrier for 4 carriers per port. With WiMax and TD-LTE modes operating simultaneously on a port the maximum powers are 5W per carrier for up to two carriers for WiMax and 10W for a TD-LTE single carrier. This device supports 4T4R Spatial Multiplexing MIMO. RF exposure compliance is addressed at the time of licensing, as required by the responsible FCC Bureau(s), including antenna co-location requirements of §1.1307(b)(3). | |||||
1 2 3 4 | C2PC to add 20MHz LTE bandwidths and increase single-carrier power for LTE modes. Output power is combined conducted power per port. The device has four rf ports. The maximum power per port is 20W per carrier for LTE supporting one carrier per port (available only on two ports), and 10W per carrier for WiMAX and LTE supporting one or two carriers per port. Total maximum aggregate power across all four ports is 80W. This device supports 4T4R Spatial Multiplexing MIMO. The highest measured RF conducted output power at each transmitting chain for a single carrier is 10 W for WiMAX operations, 20W for LTE. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Output power is combined conducted power per port when supporting two carriers. The device has four rf ports, each rated at 10W per carrier and supporting one or two carriers per port. Total aggregate power across all four ports is 80W. This device supports 2T2R Spatial Multiplexing MIMO. The highest measured RF conducted output power at each transmitting chain for a single carrier is 9.38 W. The antennas used for this transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures. RF exposure compliance is addressed at the time of licensing, as required by the responsible FCC Bureau(s), including antenna co-location requirements of section 1.1307(b)(3) of the Rules. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
HCT Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
HCT Co., LTD
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
L****** Y******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
S**** L********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
82-31********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
82-31********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
82-31********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
y******@hct.co.kr
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
s******@HCT.co.kr
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 20.1837 | 0.0048 ppm | 17M9G7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 20.8449 | 0.0048 ppm | 17M9D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 8.147 | 0.0048 ppm | 13M7G7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 8.337 | 0.0048 ppm | 13M7W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 5 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 20.1837 | 0.0048 ppm | 9M15G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 6 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 20.8449 | 0.0048 ppm | 9M17W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 20.1837 | 0.0048 ppm | 17M9G7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 20.8449 | 0.0048 ppm | 17M9D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 3 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 20.1837 | 0.0048 ppm | 9M15G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 4 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 20.8449 | 0.0048 ppm | 9M17W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 20.1837 | 0.0048 ppm | 17M9G7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 20.8449 | 0.0048 ppm | 17M9D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 3 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 20.1837 | 0.0048 ppm | 9M15G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 4 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 20.8449 | 0.0048 ppm | 9M17W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 20.1837 | 0.0048 ppm | 9M15G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 27 | MO | 2496 | 2690 | 20.8449 | 0.0048 ppm | 9M17W7D |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC